DEVELOPING GUIDELINES FOR CONSERVING THE WORKS OF STANLEY THOMPSON,
GOLDEN AGE GOLF COURSE ARCHITECT
A Thesis
Presented to
The Faculty of Graduate Studies
of
The University of Guelph
by
KIRSTEN L BROWN
In partial fulfillment of requirements
For the degree of
Master of Landscape Architecture
August 2010
© Kirsten L. Brown, 2010 Library and Archives Bibliotheque et 1*1 Canada Archives Canada Published Heritage Direction du Branch Patrimoine de I'edition 395 Wellington Street 395, rue Wellington Ottawa ON K1A 0N4 Ottawa ON K1A 0N4 Canada Canada
Your file Votre reference ISBN: 978-O-494-68055-1 Our file Notre reference ISBN: 978-0-494-68055-1
NOTICE: AVIS:
The author has granted a non L'auteur a accorde une licence non exclusive exclusive license allowing Library and permettant a la Bibliotheque et Archives Archives Canada to reproduce, Canada de reproduire, publier, archiver, publish, archive, preserve, conserve, sauvegarder, conserver, transmettre au public communicate to the public by partelecommunication ou par I'Intemet, preter, telecommunication or on the Internet, distribuer et vendre des theses partout dans le loan, distribute and sell theses monde, a des fins commerciales ou autres, sur worldwide, for commercial or non support microforme, papier, §Iectronique et/ou commercial purposes, in microform, autres formats. paper, electronic and/or any other formats.
The author retains copyright L'auteur conserve la propriete du droit d'auteur ownership and moral rights in this et des droits moraux qui protege cette these. Ni thesis. Neither the thesis nor la these ni des extraits substantiels de celle-ci substantial extracts from it may be ne doiventfetre imprim§ s ou autrement printed or otherwise reproduced reproduits sans son autorisation. without the author's permission.
In compliance with the Canadian Conformement a la loi canadienne sur la Privacy Act some supporting forms protection de la vie privee, quelques may have been removed from this formulaires secondares ont ete enleves de thesis. cette these.
While these forms may be included Bien que ces formulaires aient inclus dans in the document page count, their la pagination, il n'y aura aucun contenu removal does not represent any loss manquant. of content from the thesis.
1+1 Canada ABSTRACT
DEVELOPING GUIDELINES FOR CONSERVING THE WORKS OF STANLEY THOMPSON, GOLDEN AGE GOLF COURSE ARCHITECT
Kirsten L. Brown Advisor: University of Guelph, 2010 Professor C. Paine
The Golden Age of golf course architecture has provided some of the most notable examples of naturalistic and strategic design in North America. Therefore, understanding features integral to expressing the designer's original vision should be a decisive first step in planning alterations to Golden Age courses. This study develops guidelines formulated specifically to evaluate golf courses designed by Canadian,
Stanley Thompson. The research investigates two distinct topics, using independent studies for each to: extract Thompson's principles (53) from his thoughts and philosophies on design through historical research; and, to develop a conservation framework through comparison of current heritage conservation policies and best practices from Canada, United States and United Kingdom and a synthesis of relevant concepts. Thompson's design principles are then integrated with the conservation framework to generate detailed guidelines that can be used to inventory and evaluate the significance and integrity of original and extant features of his designs.
Key Terms: design principles, heritage conservation framework (policies/practices), validation golf course alteration/renovation/preservation/modernization and strategic golf course design Acknowledgements
I would like to thank my thesis advisor, Cecelia Paine, for her guidance and support throughout this process and for sharing with me her incredible wealth of knowledge in the area of heritage conservation.
Thank you to Sean Kelly, my academic advisor throughout the MLA program and committee member for this project, for always having time to listen and for his constant encouragement.
Thanks also to the Stanley Thompson Society for introducing me to Thompson's work and for inspiring me to pursue this research.
Finally, a special thanks to my big sis for always leading the way; to my mom for teaching me to never, never, never, give up; to my editor June for enduring countless hours of bedtime reading; and, last but certainly not least, to Michael for his endless support and for always taking the time to 'go over it' with me! You have been my greatest sources of strength and inspiration!
Now...on to the next!
i Table of Contents
Abstract
Acknowledgements I Table of Contents n
CHAPTER | one
1.0 Introduction 1
1.01 Thompson's Contribution and Influence 1
1.02 Thompson's Design Philosophy 3
1.1 The Research 4
1.2 Research Goal & Objectives 7
1.3 Thesis Overview 8
CHAPTER | two - STANLEY THOMPSON: CONTEXT AND PRINCIPLES
2.0 Chapter Introduction 10
PART I: HISTORY OF GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE AND THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTION AND INFLUENCE
2.1 The Origin and Evolution of Golf and Golf Course Architecture 10
2.2 The History of Golf Course Architecture in North America 16
2.2.1 The Golden Age of Golf Course Design 17
2.3 Stanley Thompson's Contribution and Influence 20
2.3.1 Thompson's Contributions to Golf Course Architecture in Canada 20
2.3.2 Thompson's Influence on Golf Course Architecture in Canada 24
PART II: THOMPSON'S DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES AND DISTILLING PRINCIPLES
2.4 General Principles and Philosophies of Golf Course Design 29
2.4.1 General Principles of Golf Course Design 29
2.4.2 General Philosophies of Golf Course Design 31
2.5 Methods: Distilling Thompson's Principles 36
2.5.1 Sources and Types of Evidence 38
ii 2.5.2 Data Collection 41
2.5.3 Organization and Evaluation 43
2.5.4 Documentation 48
2.6 Chapter Summary 53
CHAPTER | three - HERITAGE CONSERVATION FRAMEWORK DEVELOPMENT
3.0 Chapter Introduction 54
PART I: REVIEW OF LITERATURE RELATED TO THE ASSESSMENT OF CULTURAL LANDSCAPES
3.1 Part I Introduction 54
SECTION A| theory
3.2 Landscapes vs. Cultural Landscapes 56
3.2.1 Positioning Golf Courses within the Context of Cultural Landscapes 57
3.3 Significance 60
3.3.1 Significance Criteria 61
3.3.2 Historic Context 64
3.3.3 Hierarchy for Evaluating Significance 66
3.3.4 Period of Significance 67
SECTION B | assessment process
3.4 Inventory of Original Features and Elements 68
3.4.1 Scale 68
3.4.2 Landscape Characteristics & Character-Defining Elements 70
3.4.3 Chronology & Physical History 75
3.5 Existing Conditions 75
3.6 Historic Integrity 77
3.6.1 Assessing Historic Integrity 78
3.7 Contributing and Non-Contributing Features 81
3.8 Documenting & Using Findings 81
3.8.1 Statement of Significance 81
3.8.2 Summary Statement 84
iii 3.8.3 General Management Categories 84
3.8.4 Treatment Options 85
3.9 Part I Summary 88
PART II: SUMMARY AND COMPARISON OF ASSESSMENT METHODS
3.10 Part II Introduction 89 3.11 Scope 89 3.12 Approach to Comparison 90
3.13 Findings of Comparison 94
3.13.1 Study Sponsor 94
3.13.2 Type of Study 94
3.13.3 Scale & Level of Detail 95
3.13.4 Landscape Types 95
3.13.5 Purpose 97
3.13.6 Methods of Investigation and Procedural Focus 97
3.13.7 Summary of Approaches 98
PART III: DEVELOPMENT OF A CONSERVATION FRAMEWORK
3.14 Part II Introduction 99
3.15 Background: Cultural Landscape Assessment in the U.S. National Park Service. 99
3.16 The Heritage Conservation Framework 100
3.17 Chapter Summary 102
CHAPTER | four - GUIDELINES FOR EVALUATING GOLF COURSES DESIGNED BY STANLEY THOMPSON 4.0 Chapter Introduction 103 4.1 Guideline Structure 103 4.2 Guidelines for Evaluating Golf Courses Designed
by Stanley Thompson 106
4.2.1 Guideline Assumptions and Outline 106
4.3 Preface 107
4.3.1 Purpose and Use 107
iv 4.3.2 Qualifications for Evaluators 108
4.4 Client & Golf Course Background 109 4.4.1 Inventory Unit 109 4.4.2 Golf Course Management Summary 109
4.4.3 Historical Summary 110 4.4.4 Scope of Work Ill
4.5 Site History and Inventory 115
4.5.1 Historic Context 115
4.5.2 Golf Course Inventory 116
4.5.3 Chronology and Physical History 134
4.5.4 Research 135
4.5.5 Documenting Research Findings 138
4.6 Existing Conditions 139
4.6.1 Research 139
4.6.2 Field Investigation 140
4.6.3 Conditions Assessment 143
4.7 Analysis and Evaluation 145
4.7.1 Site History and Existing Conditions Summary 145
4.7.2 Evaluating Historic Integrity 146
4.7.3 Identifying Contributing and Non-contributing Elements 156
4.7.4 Writing the Statement of Significance 156
4.8 Golf Course Planning and Management 157
4.8.1 Golf Course Description and Base Plan 157
4.8.2 Golf Course Management Categories 159
4.9 Chapter Summary 162
Chapter | five - DEMONSTRATION & DISCUSSIONS
5.0 Demonstration Example: Banff Springs Golf Course 163
5.1 Generating Information on Client & Golf Course Background 164
v 5.1.1 Inventory Unit 164 5.1.2 Golf Course Management Summary 164
5.1.3 Historical Summary 165
5.2 Site History and Inventory 169 5.2.1 Consideration #1 171 5.2.2 Consideration #2 173
5.3 Chronology and Physical History 177
5.4 Existing Conditions 180
5.4.1 Closing Sequence, Post 1987 Renovations 181
5.4.2 1st Hole, Post 1987 Renovations 182
5.4.3 18th Hole, Post 1987 Renovations 183
5.4.4 Conditions Assessment 183
5.5 Analysis and Evaluation 184
5.5.1 Site History and Existing Conditions Summary 184
5.5.2 Evaluating Historic Integrity 192
5.6 Discussion of Guidelines 195
5.6.1 Inventory Tables 195
5.6.2 Comprehensive Study 196
5.6.3 Access to Information 197
5.6.4 Expert-Based Approach 197
5.7 Chapter Summary 197
Chapter| six-RESEARCH SUMMARY
6.0 Comments on the Research 198
6.1 Limitations and Future Work 201 6.2 Conclusion 203
vi References 205
Archival References 216
Appendix A | Analysis of Score Golf Magazine Course Ratings 220
Appendix B| Analysis of Score Golf Magazine Course Ratings 222
Appendix C | Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Coding primary evidence. 224
Appendix D| Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Organizing data by
"indigenous" categories 238
Appendix E| Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Evaluating data and interpreting
design principles 247
Appendix F| Summary of Conservation Assessment Methods 260
vii List of Figures
Figure 1: Thesis structure diagram 8
Figure 2: Stanley Thompson ancestry 26
Figure 3: Penal golf hole 32
Figure 4: Strategic golf hole designed by Stanley Thompson 34
Figure 5: Heroic golf hole 35
Figure 6: Process for distilling Stanley Thompson's design principles 38
Figure 7: List of "indigenous categories" 44
Figure 8: List of "analyst constructed" subcategories 45
Figure 9: Thompson Principles Distilled from Primary Sources including:
Overriding, Site Selection & Routing Principles 49
Figure 10: Thompson Principles Distilled from Primary Sources including:
Principles for Bunkers and Greens Design 50
Figure 11: Thompson Principles Distilled from Primary Sources including:
Principles for Fairways, Rough, Tees & Water Features 51
Figure 12: Thompson Principles Distilled from Primary Sources including:
General Principles, Landscaping, Site Furnishings and Vegetation 52
Figure 13: Value classification for cultural landscapes 61
Figure 14: Hierarchy relationship for significance 67
Figure 15A: Landscape characteristics 73
Figure 15B: Landscape characteristics 74
Figure 16: NPS guidelines to develop support for the Statement of
Significance 83
Figure 17: Heritage conservation framework 101
Figure 18: Guideline structure 104
Figure 19: NPS guidelines for selecting boundaries 113
Figure 20: Inventory Table A, Landscape Level, Circulation 122
Figure 21: Inventory Table B, Landscape Level, Natural Systems &
Features 123 Figure 22: Inventory Table C, Landscape Level, Spatial Organization 124
Figure 23: Inventory Table D, Landscape Level, Vegetation 125
Figure 24: Inventory Table E, Landscape Level, Views & Vistas 126
Figure 25: Inventory Table F, Component Landscape Level, Archeological
sites 127
Figure 26: Inventory Table G, Component Landscape Level, Constructed Water
Features 128
Figure 27: Inventory Table H, Component Landscape Level, Natural Systems and
Features 129
Figure 28: Inventory Table I, Component Landscape Level, Spatial
Organization 130
Figure 29: Inventory Table J, Component Landscape Feature Level, Buildings &
Structures 131
Figure 30A&B: Inventory Table K, Component Landscape Feature Level,
Topography 132 & 133
Figure 31: Developing support for the Statement of Significance 157
Figure 32: Scorecard from Thompson's original routing of Banff Springs GC 171
Figure 33: Stanley Thompson's original routing plan for Banff Springs GC 172
Figure 34: Thompson's original routing with newly acquired lands highlighted.... 174
Figure 35:1st tee, Banff Springs GC (c.1930) 175
Figure 36: Approach to the 18th green, Banff Springs GC (c. 1930) 176
Figure 37: Layout of the "Tunnel" nine at Banff Springs GC 179
Figure 38: Closing sequence at Banff Springs GC post 1987 renovations... 181 & 185
Figure 39: Scorecard for the closing sequence at Banff Springs GC post 1987
renovations 181 & 186
Figure 40: Thompson course, 1st hole, post 1987 renovations 182 & 188
Figure 41: Thompson course, 18th hole, post 1987 renovations 183 & 190
Figure 42: Thompson's original closing sequence at Banff Springs GC 185
IX Figure 43: Thompson's original scorecard for the closing sequence at
Banff Springs GC 186
Figure 44:1st hole of Thompson's original design 188
Figure 45:18th hole of Thompson's original design 190
Figure 46: The approach shot to Thompson's original 18th green 191
Figure 47: Thompson course, approach shot to the 18th green
post 1987 renovations 191
List of Tables
Table 1: Number of Thompson designs ranked among the top courses in Canada (1988-2008) 24
Table 2: Number of Thompson and Thompson ancestor designs ranked among the top courses in Canada (1988-2008) 27
Table 3: List of Stanley Thompson's Manuscripts and Publications 42
List of Charts
Chart A: Comparison of Methods 92
Chart B: Comparison of Methods 93
X CHAPTER I one
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Golden Age (1900-pre WWII) was the first significant era in the history of golf course design in North America. This was the beginning of formal golf course architecture based on principles derived by golf course architects through their study of the historic courses at the home of golf in the British Isles. These golf course architects were extraordinarily skilled in their ability to creatively and artistically translate the essence, mystery and in particular the strategic philosophies that defined those early courses to North American soil, thus producing several of our most treasured golf courses (Shackelford 1999).
1.01 THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTION AND INFLUENCE
Stanley Thompson was Canada's most prolific and respected Golden Age golf course architect. His exceptional career spanned five decades (Barclay 2000) and although his portfolio is believed to include over 145 golf courses throughout South America, the
Caribbean, the United States and Canada (Mingay2006), Thompson's greatest and most enduring contributions exists within the Canadian cultural landscape. A recent study of his work in Canada indicates that Thompson designed, redesigned and/or constructed
124 golf courses throughout nine provinces across the country (Paine & Brown 2008-2010), arguably making him responsible for one of the county's largest bodies of designed historic landscapes. A number of his works have been, and continue to be, recognized
Pgi among the top 100 golf courses in Canada (MacWood n.d., Goif.com n.d.) and more have
become landmarks within their local communities.
Thompson's influence on the evolution of golf and golf course architecture in
Canada has also been profound. Former Thompson apprentice and golf historian
Geoffrey Cornish indicates that the wisdom of his design philosophy has been passed
down through generations and has touched over seventy international architects that
have descended from the Thompson tree (Stanley Thompson Society n.d.). Cornish says he
was "a giant of our profession, one who continues to influence golf and its playing fields
at the end of one millennium and at the start of another". He continues by
complimenting the recent works of modern era architects and says, "these impressive
layouts and their designers are indebted to Stanley Thompson" (Barclay 2000, Foreword).
Thompson's contributions to Canadian history and to the field of golf course architecture have been recognized not only by the governing bodies of golf in Canada, the Ontario and Canadian Golf Halls of Fame (Golf Association of Ontario n.d.), but also by the
Canadian Government designating him a Person of National Historic Significance in 2006
(Donovan 2004-2005A) for his "outstanding and lasting contribution to Canadian history"
(Historic Sites and Monuments Board 2001).
Pg2 1.02 THOMPSON'S DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
"Practicing golf course architecture without studying the links of
Scotland, is like a divinity student not reading the Bible"
- Stanley Thompson (as cited in Donovan 2004-2005A, p263).
Thompson was a gifted player, a dynamic artist and a knowledgeable agronomist
(Donovan 2004-2005A) who, like many of his contemporaries, spent time in the formative years of his design career studying the historic courses of the British Isles. Exposure to the raw natural aesthetic and strategic philosophy of those early links design would shape Thompson design philosophies and provide inspiration for his work (Donovan 2004-
2005A). Thompson said, "strive to retain as much of the natural ground formation as possible. The most beautiful courses are the ones that hew most closely to nature" (as cited in Shackelford 2005, p74) and he thought "the most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the duffer, while adding to the enjoyment of both" (Thompson c.1930, pll). Several of Thompson's works have become timeless and treasured representations of classic golden age golf course architecture through his translation of these and other of his design philosophies to the natural landscape.
Pg3 l.i THE RESEARCH
Golf courses are created on a living canvas and are therefore dynamic by their
very nature, evolving according to natural processes. The evolution of a golf course
landscape is often gradual, yet over time can alter the aesthetic and/or playability of the
course. Human interventions can be much more dramatic and immediate, posing a greater risk to the integrity of the original design. Together, these factors have the
potential to erode or even destroy the integrity of design features that provide evidence of the golf course architect's vision for the course (Graves & Cornish 1998).
Sadly, the degeneration of golden era golf courses is becoming an increasing reality throughout North America. In companion publications The Missing Links:
America's Greatest Lost Golf Courses and Holes (2000) and Lost Link: Forgotten
Treasures of Golfs Golden Age (2003), author Daniel Wexler documents almost one hundred golf courses, nines and holes, designed by golden era golf course architects that have either suffered extensive manipulation or that have been lost altogether over time. One notable example is provided through Wexler's (2003) analysis of North
America's most widely recognized golf course, Augusta National, designed by Alister
Mackenzie and Bobby Jones. In his discussion, Wexler (2003) argues that although the original routing remains almost entirely intact, the modernization of this course has turned Augusta National into a shadow of its former self. He goes on to provide evidence of this by describing major modifications that have altered the strategic intent on all but four of the golf holes. Wexler (2003) comments, "Augusta's present course
Pg4 bears little resemblance to its unique and wonderful original, having been methodically transformed into a less strategic, less exciting, distinctly modern affair" (pi4).
Although Wexler* s analysis of Augusta National has no direct correlation with the works of Stanley Thompson, it is relevant to this research as it demonstrates the drastic impact that extensive modifications can have on a historic golf course. It also describes a potential fate for any golden era golf course, if the implications of alterations are not measured.
On Thompson's courses, in order retain a semblance of his intent it is imperative that golf course stakeholders (e.g. owners, memberships, design team) understand the detail and complexity of the original design in order to formulate a baseline that can be used to inform master redevelopment or management processes. Without this knowledge there is a risk of damaging Thompson's work irreversibly through improperly planned and/or inappropriate alterations.
A preliminary investigation into current processes established to acquire such baseline information for historical golf courses has revealed an apparent lack of research in the area. In fact, in an article entitled The Challenges of Restoring a Classic
American Golf Course, U.S. National Park Service, Environmental Protection Specialist
Kevin Mendik (2007) writes "impairment to the historic fabric of an old golf course designed by one of the preeminent golf architects of the early 1900's is not the subject
Pg5 of wide-ranging scholarly discussion or even debate in most cases, but it should be" (p3).
He continues, at present "there is simply no unifying set of guidelines for golf courses,
public or private" (p3), but suggests there are strong correlations between processes
currently employed in the assessment of historic buildings and landscapes (within the
National Park Service) and that these processes could be applied for the conservation of
historical golf courses (Mendik2007).
The following research anticipates bridging this gap in knowledge by developing
an expert-based approach to inventory and analysis grounded in heritage conservation theory. Guidelines developed through this research are designed not simply to assess
historical golf courses generally, but rather they are focused specifically to examine the
unique and defining characteristics of Stanley Thompson's courses.
Pg6 1.2 RESEARCH GOAL AND OBJECTIVES
The goal of this research is to develop guidelines that contribute to conserving features integral to expressing Stanley Thompson's design vision.
Objectives for this research are to:
1. Examine Thompson's professional records to extract his design principles;
2. Review important concepts in heritage conservation theory, summarize and
compare current policies and best practices from Canada, the United States and
the United Kingdom and synthesize most relevant concepts to develop a
conservation framework; and
3. Integrate Thompson's design principles with the conservation assessment
framework to formulate guidelines that contribute to identifying and evaluating
the significance and integrity of original and extant features of his designs.
The guidelines developed through this research are designed to contribute to the conservation of Thompson's courses through application, by producing a baseline of information that has the potential to enlighten golf course stakeholders about the significance of their golf course; to guide club policies and philosophies regarding conservation; and to inform planning and management processes to ensure that the essence of Thompson's original vision can be respected.
Pg7 1.3 THESIS OVERVIEW
or| CHAPTER! e outlines the need for research, identifies the goal and objectives
and provides an overview of the study.
In this research, CHAPTERS!
CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT two, three & four are X CMrmlom GOALS designed specifically to OBJECTIVES address one of the research
STANLEY HERITAGE THOMPSON CONSERVATION objectives. Since there are METHODOLOGY METHOOOLOGY
INTEWaETJVE REVIEW Cwnu|thfH HISTORICAL CKATTUltwn COWARE &ESEASCH SYNTHESIZE two distinct topics,
DISTILL DERIVE DESIGN CONSERVATION two anc PRINCIPLES FRAMEWORK CHAPTERS! * three are
ofnoN MUNCXKU organized as discrete + CONMMWnON ASSESSMENT FRAMEWORK Ounnll investigations that are
•••>f INTEGRATE •{<••• conducted concurrently, GUIDELINES each involving a literature EXAMPLE OF GUIDELINE Owmwlftw APPLICATION & DISCUSSION review for the subject,
LIMITATIONS, appropriate research H/rt/RE WORK, &*nw| th APPLICATION fc CONCLUSIONS methodologies designed to Figure 1: Thesis structure diagram suit the examination and
two each producing respective outcomes. Findings in CHAPTERS! & three are then integrated in CHAPTER! four to develop the guidelines.
Pg8 CHAPTER] two is presented in two parts. The first part establishes a context for
Stanley Thompson's work based on his contributions to and influence in the field of golf course architecture and based on design trends prevalent throughout the Golden Era.
The second part develops and applies a methodology for extracting Thompson's design principles from his thoughts and philosophies on golf course architecture as recorded in his professional records.
CHAPTER! three is developed in 3 parts to ultimately create a framework grounded in conservation theory that is used as a structure for the guidelines presented in CHAPTER] four. Part I describes relevant concepts from heritage conservation related to the assessment of cultural/historic landscapes. Part II provides a comparison of current conservation policies and best practices from Canada, the United States and the
United Kingdom to identify approaches that are most appropriate for the purposes of developing a conservation framework. Part III outlines the methodology used to synthesize relevant concepts and describes the conservation framework.
CHAPTER! four outlines the guideline structure and describes the details of the guidelines created to assess golf courses designed by Stanley Thompson.
CHAPTER | five demonstrates how the guidelines are intended to function in a site application, using one example from Banff Springs Golf Club, AB.
CHAPTER] six discusses the limitations, future work and relevance of the study.
Pg9 CHAPTER! two
STANLEY THOMPSON: CONTEXT AND PRINCIPLES
2.0 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER! two was designed in two parts with the following outcomes in mind: to
establish Stanley Thompson as a significant figure in Canadian cultural history and to
distill principles from Thompson's thoughts and philosophies on golf course
architecture.
Part I will establish Stanley Thompson as a significant Canadian figure by first
describing the history and evolution of golf and golf course architecture to develop a
historical context for his career, and then by defining the extent and influence of
Thompson's contributions to the Canadian landscape and the field of golf course
architecture. Part II will define a set of design principles visible within Thompson's body
of work that have been extracted using an interpretive method of historical research.
Pgio PART I: HISTORY OF GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE AND THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTION AND
INFLUENCE
2.1 THE ORIGIN AND EVOLUTION OF GOLF AND GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE
The specific origins of golf are uncertain. The History of Golf as described by
Golf Travel Scotland (n.d.) suggests that over the course of history throughout Europe there were several games played with balls and sticks that could conceivably have provided the genesis for the game that we recognize today as golf. They indicate that the game was first documented in Scotland in the 15th century when, Scottish
Parliament passed legislation banning a game known then as 'Gowf on Sundays. This new law responded to the rising popularity of the game, which they felt could compromise the nation's security as the people were taking time away from practising the "skills of archery" to play the game of golf. Since then, Scotland has been credited with nurturing and developing the game of golf from its infancy on their coastal links lands (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d.).
European golf course architect, Christoph Stadler (n.d.) describes the term links as an area of relatively infertile sand dunes that formed the connection between more bountiful lands and the sea. He suggests that the earliest courses were not created at the hand of a golf course architect, but rather they evolved according to the natural
progression of the landscape. In those days the only defined characteristic of a golf hole was a terminating point, which was marked by a flagstick and the game was literally
Pgii played from one flagstick to the next, navigating the variety of features inherent in the
raw natural terrain along the way (stadler, n.d.).
Golf Travel Scotland (n.d) indicates that participation in the game of golf
flourished throughout the 18th century and an industry began to emerge that included
an evolution in golf equipment and the establishment of several new courses along the
Scottish coastline (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d.). Although these new courses were being formed, their designs remained rudimentary and unstructured, consisting of anywhere from five to twenty-five holes, laid out over the existing natural terrain (stadler, n.d.).
Stadler (n.d.) attributes the origins of golf design to changes made at the Old
Course in St. Andrews by the society of St. Andrews in 1764. He indicates that the original routing consisted of eleven holes, which were commonly played in two directions to provide a 22-hole round of golf. Alterations to the course included the amalgamation of the first four holes into two new starting/finishing holes, resulting in a
9 or an 18-hole round if played out and back (Stadler n.d.). Stadler notes that in subsequent years, as participation in the game continued to grow, parallel fairways and double greens were developed to accommodate increased demand and as a result the
Old Course at St. Andrews became the first true 18-hole "loop" in golf. This would mark a significant moment in the game of golf and golf course design, because as the Society of St. Andrews transformed to become the Royal & Ancient Golf Club (R&A) and began
Pgl2 to govern the rules of the game, the new 18-hole layout set a standard for all courses that followed (Stadler, n.d.).
Golf Travel Scotland (n.d.) indicates that by the mid 19th century, golf was rapidly transitioning from a Scottish pastime to a continental fascination for the people of the
British Isles. Growth in the golf industry coincided with and benefited from advances that included steam-powered railways. Railways arrived on the east cost of Scotland by
1852, facilitating mass tourism and the dissemination of what had become the country's beloved national pastime (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d.).
Golf Travel Scotland (n.d.) suggests that as the game grew, equipment technologies began to evolve, making the game easier to play and thus more accessible to the masses. One of the most significant advances came in 1848 with the introduction of the "gutta percha" or "guttie" golf ball developed by James Patterson (Golf Travel
Scotland, n.d.). Charles Edwards (2009) indicates that this new ball was more durability than previous balls because it was made from the sap of a Gutta Percha (Palaquium gutta) tree (Wikipedia: Gutta-percha, n.d.). Edwards (2009) suggests that the material itself was revolutionary because it could be manipulated when heated, but became rigid as it cooled, meaning that surface abrasions could be easily repaired. This soon rendered its predecessor, the "feathery" obsolete (Edwards 2009). As the ball evolved so too did club technologies (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d.)
Pgl3 Increased participation and advances in equipment technologies began to have profound and lasting impacts on the game and its playing grounds (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d.). Changes in equipment inspired a more aggressive style of play, which in turn resulted in more abrasions to the turf. This was particularly evident within a club length's radius of each hole, as the rules of golf in the day required a ball to be teed within this proximity of the previous hole (Kelley, n.d.). In response to this issue, legendary golf course designer Old Tom Morris began to relocate teeing grounds away from putting surfaces altogether in his work at the Old Course in 1875, creating grounds dedicated specifically for the tee shot (Historical Rules of Golf Pages). Morris introduction of this design element allowed for the green surfaces to become reserved exclusively for the purposes of putting and was the first of many design trends that would follow
(Scottish Golf History 2003-2007, n.d.)
Golf Travel Scotland (n.d.) indicates that Old Tom Morris was considered a jack- of-all-trades, a skilled club maker, golf professional and green keeper, but that his greatest contributions to golf were in the area of course design (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d).
Author Geoff Shackelford (1999) calls Morris the "first-ever golf course architect" (pi6) and Golf Travel Scotland (n.d.) credits Old Tom Morris for developing the "first purpose- built golf course" at Prestwick Golf Club in Scotland (Golf Travel Scotland, n.d., 1850 -1890: The
Morris and Park Era, 113). This is a course praised by Shackelford (1999) as "one of
Scotland's most important early courses"(pi6). Morris subsequently translated his design philosophies through several significant historic designs including Royal County Down,
Pgl4 Royal Dornoch and Muirfield and redesigns at the Old Course at St. Andrews,
Machrihanish and Carnoustie (Shackelford 1999).
Morris influence would extend far beyond the British Isles with notable and profound impacts on the next generation of golf course architects.
Horace Hutchinson commented,
Old Tom is the most remote point to which we can carry back our
genealogical inquiries into the golfing styles, so that we may virtually
accept him as the common golfing ancestor who has stamped the
features of his style most distinctly on his descendants (as cited in
Shackelford 1999, pg 16). 2.2 THE HISTORY OF GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE IN NORTH AMERICA
Golf historian Thomas Finley (1999) indicates, the earliest evidence of golf in
North America was recorded in a "schedule of events" for the South Carolina Golf Club
published in the local Charleston, South Carolina newspaper in 1786. He goes on to
describe the organization as primarily a social club that gathered periodically for events,
however there is no record of a permanent site or golf course. Finley (1999) suggests
that similar groups later formed in Savannah but comments, "we can imagine these
early outings would resemble chipping and putting contests" (H4). Through his research
Finley (1999) identifies Royal Montreal Golf Club as North American's first permanent
golf course, established in Quebec in 1873. At that time, few North Americans knew of
the game, let alone played it (Shackelford 1999), but by the 1890s golf was becoming a
burgeoning pastime and course construction was catching its stride (Finley 1999).
Shackelford (1999) suggests that in its infancy, golf course design in North
America had witnessed a complete departure from the natural aesthetic of the historic courses found in the home of golf in the British Isles. Instead of raw unadulterated golf course landscapes, many of the early North America courses displayed abrasive geometry and artificial features that were in dramatic contrast with their natural canvas.
This aesthetic characterized by Shackelford (1999) as "primitive and downright freakish"
(p4), however, would not last long. By the turn of the 20th century a new generation of golf course designers began to emerge, rebelling against the artificial geometric styling
Pgl6 of the previous. One of those up-and-coming designers, Charles Blair Macdonald, commented on the state of contemporary design saying:
Viewing the monstrosities created on many modern golf courses, which
are a travesty on nature, no golfer can but shudder for the soul of golf. It
would seem that in this striving after 'novelty and innovation', many
builders of golf courses believe they are elevating the game. But what a
sad contemplation! (as cited in Shackelford 1999, p3)
This new cohort of golf course architects were instead inspired by the nuances and natural aesthetic of the historic courses of the British Isles. This marked the beginning of an era of enlightenment in golf course design, known as the "Golden Age"
(Shackelford 1999).
2.2.1 THE GOLDEN AGE OF GOLF COURSE DESIGN
Shackelford (1999) suggests that the Golden Age began in 1911 with the brilliant work of C.B. Macdonald at the National Golf Links course on Long Island, New York and concluded in 1937 with Perry Maxwell's creation of the first nine at Prairie Dunes in
Hutchinson, Kansas. He acknowledges that other significant contributions were made prior to Macdonald's work at National Golf Links, but uses Macdonald's and Maxwell's works to define the beginning and end of this very important period in the history of
North American golf course architecture (Shackelford, 1999).
Pgl7 The Golden Age is fundamental to this thesis research, as it is the period in which
Stanley Thompson lived, worked and established his significance. The economic
conditions, technological innovations and stylistic trends in golf course design
throughout this era provide a context for Thompson's work and design philosophies.
The Golden Age of golf course architecture (particularly after World War I)
coincided with economic prosperity throughout North America that was being driven by
innovation and expansion in the transportation and communication industries
(Shackelford 1999). By 1930, golf had become an incredibly popular leisure activity throughout North America with participation surging to 2.25 million players in the
United States (Shackelford 1999) and 250,000 in Canada (Donovan 2004-2005A, from Barclay
2000). Correspondingly, the inventory new golf courses exploded to include over 5000 courses throughout the United States (Shackelford 1999) and over 600 courses in Canada
(Donovan 2004-2005A, from Barclay 2000).
The individuals responsible for developing this wave of new golf course development were numerous, yet had several characteristics in common. One of the most significant figures was Charles Blair Macdonald who became widely regarded as
"the father of golf course architecture in North America" (Alister Mackenzie as cited in
Shackelford 1999, p3i). Other notable Golden Age golf course architects included, but were certainly not limited to: Alister MacKenzie, Seth Reynor, Charles Banks, George Crump,
Pgl8 Hugh Wilson, Albert Warren Tillinghast, George C. Thomas Jr., Donald J. Ross and Perry
Maxwell and of course Stanley Thompson (Shackelford 1999).
Shackelford (1999) indicated that many of these designers were fearless and exhibited bold creativity in their work. He also says that a majority of the golf course architects of that era were inspired by the natural aesthetic and strategic philosophies of Old Tom Morris and by the historic courses of the British Isles (Shackelford 1999). Many of the golf courses produced in that era captured the magic and mystery of those early courses as they were designed to "test the mental as well as the physical component of the golfer's game" (Shackelford I999,p3), yet they were meant to be enjoyable for "all skill levels of golfers" at the same time (p3i). Shackelford (1999) for one, feels that the skill and creativity of this group of golf course designers has to date (prior to 1999) been unrivaled, providing several of our most enduring treasured golf courses today.
Pgl9 2.3 STANLEY THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTION AND INFLUENCE
"He left a mark on the Canadian landscape from coast to coast.
No man could ask for a more handsome set of memorials."
- Obituary in the Ottawa Citizen, January 5,1953
(Donovan 2004-2005A, p 295)
2.3.1 THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTIONS TO GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE IN CANADA
Parks Canada historian Ken Donovan (2004-2005A) describes Stanley Thompson as a "pioneerof golf course architecture in Canada and abroad" (p253-254). He has been ranked among the most talented and prolific golf course architects of the Golden Age
(Shackelford 1999), practising primarily in Canada from just after the First World War until his death in 1953 (Barclay 2000, Donovan 2004-2005A). Thompson's portfolio is estimated to include work on over 145 golf courses throughout North and South America and in the
Caribbean (Mingay 2006, Donovan 2004-2005A); however, the largest and most recognizable segment of his body of work, by far, resides in Canada.
A recent study (Paine & Brown 2010) documents Thompson's involvement with 124 golf courses in nine provinces throughout Canada and confirms the nature and extent of his work on 58 of them through primary evidence such as: plans, specifications, site notes, contract documents and internal documents.
Pg20 Many of Thompson's courses have become recognized landmarks within their local community and have received national and/or international acclaim. Author and golf course architect Jeff Mingay (2006) says, "Canadian golfers revere Thompson- designed courses as national landmarks, especially his big five".
Jasper Park Lodge golf course was the first of Thompson's "big five" (Mingay 2006), developed in 1923 for the Canadian National Railway (Barclay 2000). With this design
Thompson quickly garnered recognition from his peers. One of his contemporaries, Dr.
Alister MacKenzie commented on the project in an article entitled "Settled: Gleneagles, high praise for mountain resort links" (1928):
Jasper Park Lodge golf course, Canada has taken the lead in golf course
architecture and produced 18 holes that within the whole scope of my
experience and knowledge are not surpassed...quite apart from its scenic
features, which are glorious, and considering it purely from the golfing
standpoint, I consider this course to be the best I have ever seen...it is
greater even than Gleneagles of which, we in the British Isles, are
incredibly proud. - Dr. A. MacKenzie
The significance of Thompson's efforts at Jasper Park Lodge continues to be recognized today as evidenced in a recent posting on the Golf Club Atlas website (n.d.) which reads, "the bar in Canadian golf course architecture was forever raised. Though
Pg21 some excellent designs.-.Stanley Thompson's ability to build a course in the wilder
environments of Canada was a breakthrough moment".
According to Donovan (2004-2005A), Thompson followed this effort with his
brilliant and innovative creation at Banff Springs Hotel golf course in 1927 for Canadian
Pacific Railway. Together theses two courses propelled Thompson onto the world stage
by attracting international publicity. Both courses continue to be amongst his most
celebrated and enduring accomplishments (Donovan 2004-2005A).
By the onset of the great depression Thompson was completing the third of his
early masterpieces, the Royal York Hotel Golf Club (now known as St. George's Golf
Course) in Toronto, Ontario and despite the economic climate of the time Thompson
managed to complete two more notable courses: Capilano Golf Course in West
Vancouver, BC (1932-1936) and Highland Links in Cape Breton, Nova Scotia (1938-1939)
(Donovan 2004-2005A, Barclay 2000).
A measure of the popularity of these courses came when The National Golf
Review established a ranking system that would be used to recognize the world's top
100 golf courses. The first edition of this annual ranking was released in their annual review in 1939 (MacWood, n.d.). Author Thomas MacWood (n.d.) describes the review committee as an international panel of experts that included golf course architects, golf professionals and golf writers. He says that courses from 18 countries were evaluated
Pg22 not for their difficulty but rather for the "amount of interest it can stir in the breast"
(MacWood, n.d. H5). When results were revealed in 1939, four of Thompson's "big five"
(Mingay 2006) were positioned among the "world's finest tests" (MacWood n.d., H4) of golf.
Banff Springs golf course ranked 8th in the world, ahead of notable courses such as
Augusta National, USA (ii\ Sunningdale, UK (19th), Gleneagles, Scotland (30th), Winged
Foot, USA (32th). Jasper Park Lodge golf course ranked 36th, the Royal York Hotel golf course ranked 62nd, and Capilano golf course ranked 79th in the world (MacWood, n.d.).
The National Golf Review no longer exists, but the top 100 golf courses in the world continue to be ranked in Golf Magazine by an international panel of PGA tour and club professionals, golf course architects, elite amateurs, photographers, journalists, historians and a small group of golf connoisseurs (Golf.com). Currently, St. George's golf course (formerly Royal York Hotel golf course) and Highland Links golf course continue to rank among the top 100 in the world (Golf.com).
In Canada, Score Magazine has ranked the top Canadian golf courses on a bi annual basis since 1988. The first edition only considered the top 15 courses in the country; however, by 2000 the top 100 courses in the country were recognized (Score
Magazine n.d.). As a testament to Thompson's classic and enduring styles, a review of the bi-annual results indicates that Thompson's courses continue to represent more than
10% of the top-ranked golf courses in the country. Table 1 below presents these findings, with further detail available in Appendix A.
Pg23 Ranking Year Total # of Golf # of Thompson Courses Percentage of the list Courses Ranked Listed Thompson's work 1988 15 4 27%
1990 25 5 20%
1992 25 6 24%
1994 50 8 19%
1996 50 9 18%
1998 50 9 18%
2000 100 14 14%
2002 100 19 19%
2004 100 12 12%
2006 100 12 12%
2008 100 14 14%
Table 1: Number of Thompson designs ranked among the top courses in Canada (1988-2008)
2.3.2 THOMPSON'S INFLUENCE ON GOLF COURSE ARCHITECTURE IN CANADA
Thompson's commitment to and influence in the field of golf course architecture has extended beyond his own work. He instilled his philosophies of design in apprentices who would in turn inspire subsequent generations of golfers and golf course architects. Some of those who worked alongside him included Robbie Robinson,
Howard Watson, Norman Wood, Robert Moote, Geoffrey Cornish and Robert Trent
Jones (Donovan 2004-2005A).
Robert Trent Jones, who spent a short period of time apprenticing for Thompson before becoming his business partner, subsequently became one the most widely
Pg24 recognized golf course architects of all time, responsible for over 500 designs and an additional 500 renovations. For his contribution Jones has become known as the 'father of modern golf course architecture' (Cornish & whitten 1993 pp 306-307, as cited in Donovan
2004-2005A). Regardless of his success however, Jones always had the utmost respect for
Thompson. In fact, in his book Golf's Magnificent Challenge, Jones (1988) commented,
"beauty and naturalness were Thompson's hallmarks...it was this philosophy, so like mine, that drew us together"(p77) and then went on to recognize Thompson as
"Canada's greatest [golf course] architect" ever (Jones 1988, p77).
Geoffrey Cornish, a former Thompson apprentice with over 240 golf courses to his credit, has also become a leading golf historian, devoting over 50 years to researching the lineage of significant golf course designers (Donovan 2004-2005B). Through his research Cornish has been able to identify 35 distinct golf course design trees and has established Thompson's (Figure 2) among the six largest in the world (Graves & Cornish
2002, p.27, in Donovan 2004-2005B).
Pg25 STANLEY THOMPSON TIES OhMffiM STANLEY THOMPSON ASGCA (1893-1953)
i 1 1 1 • 1 1 ILfcrtTMrtkM. GmflfoyLCMtu* JLAmF Moot. ClitflLfeMaM KmWtlM UmariWatm N»niM«M)d> A50CA A50CA ASOCA ASOCA ASOCA ASOCA (HM-SMO) (1914- ) (1924- ) (1947-I419) ( - ) (1907-1992) (19M-19I7)
/ I 1 T~^ 1 1 1 I 1 | 1 ' 1 | ' 1 1 wahMi Ihbi.im BnMSibrt UstMiMfMm lli>w«4M*mr TuMtbyGMiuk Bnmk*ma* DmniLMon*DwtKjrty^xfcD«gl«Cwwck TVuMUcBratM. --['infrrl I JghaWatm TWIbfer (ASOCA) ASOCA ASOCA (IMS- > 0970- ) (1977. ) ASOCA (1919. ) ASGCA ASOCA (1949- ) ASOCA ( • ) [1941- ) r*"^ i ' i i i LunakUCafbl J_u.I*>* IXata IkftaaUdto Kalllrat* »*•(*« ( • ) ( - ) ( - ) ( - ) ASOCA < • ) ( • ) -j J 1 | | | 1 1 1 1 ! IUbHlTfMJ Kohnrfriwir »*«« Bwwvtl TanWaduvT CKKTMOTTUII MbmHimy j Tmjobuca^ Gwlwi ( . ) ASOCA (1942- ) ( - ) ASOCA / ASOCA (1933. ) ASOCA ASOCA (1947- ) (1*1- ) 0943- ) / (1933- ) . (1947. ) (1»3I - ) I ' 1 1 1 I ' 1 ' KnAEvw. CW|MiuriM*l SIMGM4T Stw.»W« JUSEMMSA BubwlKjnM TinFmfad ASOCA ASOCA ASOCA ASOCA ( - ) ( - ) ASOCA (1944. ) (1941- ) (1941- ) ( - ) (|943 - ) p- 1 ' I 1 1 1 1 G«rBu4 tnryUMU BniaChrtoa DouUKa* M*k~lF«&« C^U> KjkFUhp |UU« ASOCA ASOCA ASGCA ASOCA ASOCA ASGCA ASGCA ASOCA (1941. ) (1939- ) (1957- ) (1944- ) (1941. ) (1933- ) (1931- ) (1933- ) 1 i i 1 r T • "~ ^— 1~ tirtlloltafff ILfertMaOT StmDufcM KfrScfeliu. TOMROM UMVIMM UmGdtewfc BahOw-* tnACtmp- ASGCA ASOCA ( . ) ( . ) ( . ) ( . ) ( . ) ( - ) ( - ) (1934. ) (1933. ) Figure 2: Stanley Thompson ancestry (Source: Stanley Thompson Society, http://www4tanleythompson.com/files/stanley-thompson-d1sciples-chart.jpg) Cornish comments on Thompson's influence saying that he was "a giant of our profession, one who continues to influence golf and it's playing fields at the end of one millennium and at the start of another...designers are indebted to Stanley Thompson" (Barclay 2000, Foreword). The generation of designers that Cornish is referring to includes Doug Carrick, Graham Cooke, Les Furber, Tom McBroom, John Watson, David Moote, Ian Andrew and Ted Baker, each of whom have produced significant Canadian courses. This is confirmed by Score Magazine's ranking of top golf courses in Canada, which reveals that over the past decade at least 50% of the top ranked golf courses in Canada were either designed by Stanley Thompson or by a member of the Thompson tree (Table 2). A complete Pg26 analysis can be found in Appendix B. Ranking Number of Golf Percentage of the list Percentage of the Top 100 Year Courses Ranked Thompson's work created by Thompson or descendants of his Family Tree 1988 15 27% 33% 1990 25 20% 52% 1992 25 24% 60% 1994 50 19% 49% 1996 50 18% 54% 1998 50 18% 52% 2000 100 14% 61% 2002 100 19% 69% 2004 100 12% 57% 2006 100 12% 53% 2008 100 14% 60% Table 2: Number of Thompson and Thompson ancestor designs ranked among the top courses in Canada (1988-2008) This is significant as it provides evidence of Thompson's profound influence on the history of golf course architecture in Canada. In the twilight of his career, Thompson joined with other prominent Golden Era golf course architects like Donald Ross, Robert Trent Jones and Perry Maxwell to form the American Society of Golf Course Architects (est.l946)(American Societyof Golf Course Architects, n.d.) and served as president in 1949 (Golf Association of Ontario, n.d.). Pg27 Since his death in January 1953, Thompson has been recognized by the governing bodies of golf in Canada and by the Canadian Government for his contributions to the game of golf, to the profession of golf course architecture and to Canadian history. Thompson was inducted into the Canadian Golf Hall of Fame in 1980, the Ontario Golf Hall of Fame in 2000 (Golf Association of Ontario, n.d.) and was declared a Person of National Historic Significance on August 3,2006 for his "outstanding and lasting contribution to Canadian history" (Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada, n.d.). Pg28 PARTII: THOMPSON'S DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES AND PRINCIPLES The objective for Part II is to ultimately extract design principles from Thompson's writing that can be integrated with a conservation framework derived in CHAPTER| three, to create the guidelines presented in CHAPTER! four that will focus specifically on assessing the work of Stanley Thompson. In this part of CHAPTER | two, some general principles and philosophies of golf course design will be discussed to provide context for Thompson's design philosophies and principles. Then an interpretive method of historical research will be described and executed to distill principles of design from Thompson's own writing. 2.4 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PHILOSOPHIES OF GOLF COURSE DESIGN Golf course architects Robert Muir Graves and Geoffrey Cornish (1998) wrote, "persons in other design fields have observed that a golf course is equivalent to an art gallery with 18 huge compositions created by the designer" (P23). The details of each composition are unique and complex, yet are interconnected by elements of the natural landscape to form the collection of art. 2.4.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GOLF COURSE DESIGN According to Graves & Cornish (1998) principles of playability, aesthetics and maintenance are keys to a successful golf course design. They suggest that each requires equal consideration throughout the planning and implementation processes, but acknowledge that designers will typically focus varying degrees of detail on each of Pg29 these factors depending on their knowledge, experience and comfort level in each area (Graves & Cornish 1998). For example, skilled golfers tend to experience a landscape as they would want to play it. Therefore, golf professionals or talented amateur players might focus on playability of the course, with a majority of attention paid to features and nuances that would affect shot values, the mental strategy of the game or that would evoke certain emotions (e.g. fear, confusion, exhilaration) from the player. Meanwhile, the artist or landscape architect may emphasize the aesthetics of the course, focusing instead on experience of place and visual interest. Finally, the agronomist or superintendent might focus on the practical and functional aspects of design (e.g. position of trees surrounding greens, relative to the morning sun) ensuring that the course would remain in its intended condition given the maintenance budget of the club (Graves & Cornish 1998). Authors and historians like Ken Donovan (2004-2005A) suggest that Thompson had a unique set of skills, describing him as an accomplished amateur player, a visionary artist and an agronomist. This allowed him to balance of playability, aesthetics and maintenance within his designs, arguably contributing to the timeless nature of many of his courses. Thompson was also gifted at considering the complexities of the natural canvas and the social context of the club (Donovan 2004-2005A). Pg30 2.4.2 GENERAL PHILOSOPHIES OF GOLF COURSE DESIGN In golf course architecture the terms strategic, penal and heroic are commonly used to describe the playing characteristics of a golf hole (Richardson 2002). It is important to understand the differences between these styles of design in order to truly comprehend the underlying concept of Thompson's design philosophy. 2.4.2.1 PENAL DESIGN A penal style of design was common in the early years (prior to 20th century) of North American golf course design (Stadler n.d.). European golf course architect, Cristoph Stadler (n.d.) suggests the reason for this was that golf professionals and/or highly skilled amateur players were the first to supervise the development of new courses and thus they created courses that would suit their own game. Stadler (n.d.) characterizes a penal golf hole as one that offers a single route to the hole navigating hazards (e.g. bunkers, water, gorges) along the way that were positioned perpendicular to its centerline, leaving golfers with no option but to play aerial shots over them. Penal design is intended to challenge the skilled player, but can frustrate the weaker golfer who is not adept at getting a golf ball airborne (Stadler, n.d.). Pg31 Figure 3: Penal golf hole (Source: Forrest Richardson & Associates website, 2009). Figure 3 provides and example of penal golf hole design. On this par 3 hole, players are forced to carry the hazard, regardless of their skill level with no alternative option provided. This sort of hole can prove to be impossible for the less skilled player. Thompson used penal holes on several of his courses, although sparingly, and usually to capitalize on a natural element of the landscape or to create a breathtaking experience. Pg32 2.4.2.2 STRATEGIC DESIGN "The strategy of the golf course is the soul of the game" - George C. Thomas (as cited in Shackelford 2005, p89) Stadler (n.d.) says that at the turn of the 20th century the mindset surrounding design philosophy in golf course architecture was shifting. He indicates that golf course architects of the Golden Era understood that although the penal school of design provided dramatic experiences, this constant barrage of challenges hole after hole would eventually discourage all but the best golfers. Therefore, designers of the era naturally gravitated to the player-friendly strategic school of design that became increasingly popular as North Americans traveled to explore and examine the classic strategic designs of the historic courses in the British Isles and as sons of the homeland of golf brought their vision and skills to North America (Stadler n.d.). In contrast to penal design, strategic philosophies provided multiple routes to the hole, offering all golfers regardless of their skill level, the opportunity to navigate countless hazards successfully on route to the green. Strategic design requires that a player consider their options carefully on the tee, selecting the best route to the hole based on their skill level. This philosophy allowed architects to test the skill of the better player, while offering an enjoyable experience for the weaker player (Stadler n.d.). Pg33 As a skilled tournament player, Thompson "believed that the strategic school was the truest form of golf course design" (Shackelford 1999, pl98) and like many of his contemporaries he drew inspiration for his strategic design philosophies from the historic courses of the British Isles. In fact, he was so taken with them that he said "practicing golf course architecture without studying the links of Scotland is like a divinity student not reading the Bible" (as cited in Donovan 2004-2005A, p263). Figure 4 is an original Stanley Thompson sketch that demonstrates the strategic philosophy of providing several routes to the hole. 2.4.2.3 HEROIC DESIGN Finally, heroic design evolved subsequent to the Golden Era as an intermediate design philosophy, hovering between penal (severe) and strategic (moderate), integrating attributes of each. Figure 4: Strategic golf hole designed by Stanley Thompson Heroic holes can be dramatic (Source UoG Archives, Stanley Thompson Society Collection) as they often integrate penal Pg34 hazards; however, they are normally angled diagonally such that a player has a choice of routes to the hole. Similar to strategic design, heroic holes require a conscious decision on the part of the player as to how much of the hazard the player is prepared to challenge in order to gain optimal position for the subsequent shot. Weaker players can opt to avoid the penal hazard altogether, but the compromise fordoing so normally includes a longer route to the hole (Stadler n.d.). Figure 5: Heroic golf hole (Source: Forrest Richardson & Associates website, 2009). Figure 5 demonstrate the drama and excitement of a heroic hole as well as the various options available to arrive at the hole. Pg35 2.5 METHODS: DISTILLING THOMPSON'S PRINCIPLES Stanley Thompson had clear philosophies of design that contributed to defining his unique and enduring style. However, a review of his professional documents and correspondence with the Stanley Thompson Society (STS) has revealed that he never articulated his thoughts as a set of design principles. Therefore, section 2.5 of CHAPTER | two seeks to present a set of principles that will be extracted from Thompson's thoughts and philosophies of design as recorded in his professional record. The researcher acknowledges that the Stanley Thompson Society has made tremendous efforts over the past decade to preserve Thompson's work and legacy and in so doing has formulated design principles from the memories and personal experiences of Thompson's apprentices. Research in this of CHAPTER | two, is by no means intended to question the relevance or reliability of their methods or findings, but rather seeks to enhance the current understanding of Thompson's design principles. A qualitative method of historical inquiry is used in this research to distill meaningful design principles from primary sources of evidence. Historical research was determined to be conducive for the purposes of this investigation because it is concerned with the reality of historical events: what was actually said or occurred at a particular moment in history, rather than what should have happened, been said or been thought (Busha & Harter 1980). Pg36 In their book entitled Architectural Research Methods, Linda Groat and David Wang (2001) describe "interpretive-historical research" as an approach that "attempts to collect as much (information) as possible about a complex social phenomenon and then provide an account of that phenomenon" based on an interpretation of the data (pi37). They demonstrate a process that includes identifying sources, gathering and organizing data, analyzing information and presenting findings (Groat & Wang 2001). For the purposes of the research in CHAPTER | two, Section 2.5, it was logical to collect as much primary evidence as possible regarding Thompson's approach to golf course design. However, the intent was not to develop a holistic historical narrative that encompasses his design philosophies, but was rather to compile enough evidence to distill meaningful design principles. The approach outlined by Groat & Wang (2001) provided a logical framework (Figure 6) for this investigation. Data collected was then distilled and interpreted into design principles rather than as a narrative of his philosophy. Pg37 Source & Type of Evidence Data Collection Organization & Documentation Identify source and Selecting and Evaluation type (s) of data organizing data Principles Analysis Assessment Search Evaluation Figure 6: Process for distilling Stanley Thompson's design principles (Source: adapted from Groat & Wang 2002, Chart of interpretive research, pl37) 2.5.1 SOURCES AND TYPES OF EVIDENCE The first step in the process of interpretive-historical research was to identify sources and types of data to be used in the investigation. Historical inquiry typically relies on both primary and secondary sources of historical evidence (Marshall & Rossman 1989; Busha & Harter 1980), yet Busha & Harter (1980) indicate that the most accurate account of events is derived from primary sources. Busha & Harter (1980) suggest that the key difference between primary and secondary sources resides in the proximity of the person recording the subject/event, to the actual subject/event itself. They state that primary sources reveal "first-hand information" (pi02) about the subject/event through original documents that can be linked directly to a participant or contributor (Busha & Harter 1980). Meanwhile, secondary sources tend to have been relayed by "someone other than the person" (Busha & Harter 1980, pi02). Busha & Harter (1980) argue that it is for this reason that primary sources Pg38 are considered to "enhance the validity and value of history" (pioi). Cohen & Crabtree (2006) suggest that ideally a historical investigations would triangulate primary and secondary data to provide the richest and most comprehensive perspective possible, but due to the time constraints for this thesis and given the objective of the investigation in CHAPTER] two, Section 2.5, this research has focused on primary sources exclusively. Primary evidence can be found in various forms (Primary Source at Yale, n.d.), but most relevant for the purposes of this study are Stanley Thompson's publications and manuscripts. Unlike many of his contemporaries, Thompson was not a prolific writer, authoring only one brief booklet entitled About Golf Courses: Their Construction and Up keep, c.l930s (specific publication date unknown). Therefore, much of the data for this study was derived from Thompson's unpublished business records. These materials are currently held as part of the Stanley Thompson Society (STS) collection at the University of Guelph archives (as at Jan 2010). Documents were examined in order to understand Thompson's ideas and philosophies of design and construction and then design principles were distilled from the data. Busha & Harter (1980) suggest that historical inquiry requires physical documents as well as their contents to be carefully scrutinized for authenticity and reliability. As the documents used for this research are all contained within the Stanley Thompson Society collection, the researcher assumed that qualified archival staff Pg39 previously validated the authenticity of all documents within the collection. Reliability on the other hand was a consideration of the researcher as this concerns the information that a document contained, rather than where it came from. Busha & Harter (1980) describe historical evidence as either "consciously or unconsciously transmitted" (pi07). They suggest that "consciously transmitted" evidence is somewhat filtered or manipulated by the conscious mind to convey the message or point of view of the author and therefore consider it to be biased and less reliable (Busha & Harter 1980). Conversely, they consider "unconsciously transmitted" (pi07) evidence to be more reliable because the records were originally developed primarily for reference purposes (Busha & Harter 1980). Based on these descriptions, Thompson's publication and manuscripts including: design specifications and details, reports, conference presentations, annotated sketches and field notes were considered to be "consciously transmitted" and therefore according to Busha & Harter (1980) could be considered less reliable. However, given that the purpose of this investigation was to understand Thompson's ideas, these records, written in his own voice, provided the most valuable insight into his thought processes and philosophies of design. Thus, the question of reliability resided not in whether the ideas were consciously transmitted; rather, it was more important to confirm that Thompson himself in fact wrote the document. This will be addressed in discussions surrounding selection criteria in the following section. Pg40 2.5.2 DATA COLLECTION This research employed a systematic approach to reviewing, selecting and recording data. As a result of the timeline the Stanley Thompson Society collection at the University of Guelph was the sole source for this research. An initial review of the STS collection revealed forty-nine records that could provide suitable data for this research. Selection criteria were developed in order to ensure that the documents selected for analysis would be of Thompson's hand. These selection criteria for data collection included the following considerations: Documents must describe thoughts on or intent regarding design of a golf course from Stanley Thompson's perspective, and; Documents must be printed on corporate letterhead reflecting Stanley Thompson's company at that time, and/or; Documents to have been signed or handwritten by Stanley Thompson himself, and/or; Documents to have been accompanied by a letter of introduction authorized or signed by Stanley Thompson After considering each document based on the selection criteria above forty-four documents were selected for further analysis. These documents are listed in Table 3. Pg41 ARCHIVAL MATERIAL DOC REFERENCE # CODE MANUSCRIPTS* SPECIFICATIONS & DETAILS (6) #4 S. Thompson, Contract and Specifications for 18 hole golf course at Cape SDCB1 Breton Highlands National Park, 24 June, 1938, #6 S. Thompson, Specifications for completion of golf course at Cape Breton SDCB2 Highlands National ParkatMiddlehead, Ingonish, November 1938, #14 S. Thompson, Construction specifications for a 9 hole golf course at Marathon, SDMO Ontario, 28 June, 1951 #10 S. Thompson, Construction specifications for golf course at New Brunswick SDNB National Park, 1 May, 1948 #13 S. Thompson, Construction Specifications: North Oaks Golf & Country Club, St. SDNO Paul, Minnesota, 13 June, 1950 #5 S. Thompson, Contract Specifications and general details covering construction for 18 hole golf course: "The Links" at Green Gables at Prince Edward Island SDPEI National Park, 24 June, 1938 Reports (5) #2 RCAP S. Thompson, Report on Site Visit: Capilano, August 1936 #12 S. Thompson, Report: Fundy National Park Golf Course, Alma N.B., 31 October, RFNP 1949 #7 S. Thompson, Report on Rehabilitation work: Jasper Park Lodge, 23 February, RJNP 1944 #3 RMGC S. Thompson, Preliminary Report: Maritime Golf Course, 4 June, 1938 #8 S. Thompson, Follow up report: Anne of Green Gables, Prince Edward Island, RPEI1 December 1946 #11 S. Thompson, Follow up report: Anne of Green Gables, Prince Edward Island, 8 RPEI2 June, 1949 Conference address (1) #9 S. Thompson manuscript, Conference paper: "Chart Illustrating the Balance and Sequence of Holes: Amplifying address by Stanley Thompson on "The CASH Fundamentals of Golf Course Architecture", 11 February, 1948 Business correspondence (1) #1 S. Thompson to JF Dawson Esq. from Olmsted Brothers Re: Landscaping BCCAP Grounds at Capilano, 5 March, 1936 Annotated sketches and field notes (29) #15 S. Thompson, Original Notebook -29 sketches and notes related to 2nd nine at ASFN Sunningdale GC, 26 August, 1934 PUBLICATION PAGC About Golf Courses: Their Construction and Up-keep * all titles as per original document Table 3: List of Stanley Thompson's Manuscripts and Publication Once documents were selected they were each referenced according to title, date, collection and archive retrieval coordinates (call, box & file #s) in the "Archival Materials" section of the thesis reference list. Manuscripts are listed in chronological Pg42 t- order within the reference list, with a corresponding number entered in the "Archival Materials Reference number" column of Table 3, to simplify cross-referencing. The content of each document was then thoroughly examined and all text describing Thompson's thoughts on design were extracted verbatim and recorded in a Word file (Appendix C). Content extracted from each document was then assigned an identification code as demonstrated on the preceding page in the "DOC CODE" column of Table 3. 2.5.3 ORGANIZATION AND EVALUATION The methodology for extracting Thompson's principles from his writing required a synthesis of concepts from Patton's theory of inductive analysis, which addresses coding and organizing the data and Palmquist's method of content analysis, which deals with analysis of the data. 2.5.3.1 ORGANIZATION: CODING Patton (1980) suggests that inductive research allows the most important categories to "emerge from the data" (as cited in Marshall & Rossman 1989,116). He describes two types of categories "indigenous" and "analyst constructed" (as cited in Marshall & Rossman 1989, pll6). The term "indigenous", as described by Patton (1980), refers to categories that are obvious within the data, meanwhile, "analyst constructed" categories are those that are "observed by the researcher as reflecting distinct Pg43 categories" (as cited in Marshall & Rossman 1989, pll6). For example, several of the documents examined for this investigation were specifications, details and progress reports, in which Thompson specifically organized his thoughts on design according to the features of the site of the golf course including: bunkers, drainage, fairways, greens, landscape, paths & furnishings, rough, routing, site selection, tees, vegetation and water features. Each of the forty-four documents examined referred to at least one of these categories, either explicitly or implicitly and as a result they became the "indigenous categories" (Figure 7) used for coding data in this investigation. Figure 7: List of "indigenous categories" Bunker (B) Drainage (D) The initial coding process separated each Fairway (F) Green (G) document into individual quotes that related to Landscape (L) Paths & Furnishings (P) Rough (R) at least one of the Indigenous categories. Each Routing (RT) Site Selection (SS) quote was then assigned the appropriate Tees (T) Vegetation (V) category abbreviation, as in Example la below. Water Features (WF) Example la: 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain. The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically. The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of this bunker. All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with coarse sand found on the property.' (B) The preceding quote was extracted from Thompson's construction specifications for a 9-hole golf course at Marathon, Ontario, and refers to bunkers on the golf course. This quote was therefore coded using the abbreviation (B) to ensure that it would be grouped with related quotes in subsequent steps of the organization and analysis. Pg44 A secondary review of the data revealed that a majority of quotes could be further separated into sub-categories based on the general principles of golf course design identified by Grave & Cornish (1998) in Section 2.4.1 that included aesthetic qualities, playability and maintenance/function. Because these concepts were distinct from the indigenous categories and only became evident upon a secondary review of the data, they became "analyst constructed" sub-categories (Figure 8) that were used to further dissect and organize the data. Once analyst constructed sub-categories Figure 8: List of 'analyst constructed" subcategories were defined, each quote for every document Aesthetics (AS) Function (FN) was then reassessed to determine whether the Playability (PL) Maintenance (MT) ideas within the quote concerned aesthetic, playability or maintenance/functional aspects of the course. Example lb below demonstrates the additional coding. The coding described herein for all documents can be seen in Appendix C. Example lb 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain (AS). The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically (MT). The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of his bunker (PL). All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with course sand found on the property (PL).'(B) Pg45 Each quote was then transcribed in Appendix D and organized under its "indigenous category" heading. The DOC CODE was inserted at the left margin beside each quote for easy recall of the original document, if necessary, as shown in Example 2. Example 2 DOC CODE * \ SDMO 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain (AS). The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically (MT). The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of this bunker (PL). All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with coarse sand found on the property (PL)' (B) * See Table 3 Finally, quotes were dissected into their individual ideas and transcribed again in Appendix E, only this time ideas were organized within their "indigenous category", then grouped under their "analysts constructed" sub-category. 2.5.3.2 EVALUATION Mike Palmiquist (n.d.) from the Department of English at Colorado State University suggests that a rational and reductive method of content analysis allows data to be grouped into "meaningful and pertinent" units so that correlation between concepts can be systematically and objectively "analyzed and interpreted". For this research, once the content of each document had been distilled and organized, the related ideas from various documents within each category/sub-category Pg46 group were compared/examined and key words and/or phrases were highlighted illustrated in Example 3. For a comprehensive analysis of all categories and sub categories, refer to Appendix E. Example 3 Category Subcategory ~^:— BUNKERS (B): AESTHETICS SDMO Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so 3s to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain' PAGC The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling. ASFN There is a similarity about bunker mound1- Care should be taken to make variety. Peaks can be created here and thereto break the lines'. SDNB The bunkers will be seeded with the same mixture as the rough'. SDPEI 'Bunker walls and slopes will be seeded with same mixture and a* the same rate as rough'. RFNP 'Do not cut the bunkers with a straight edge. Runners of grass or points of sod m the bunkers tend to improve their appearance and take away artificiality.' RPEI1 the sand areas of the bunkers in some instances can be redu'ed but care must betaken to see the sand is well flashed up on the slopes so <*s to mai-e the bunker stand out' RPEI2 'the bunkers surrounding this green should be well flashed up to bring the surface of the green into relief. Asa matter of fau, on most of thebuni-ers around the course the grass has been allowed to encroach on the sand area so that they no longer resemble what they originally were.' RPEI2 the bunkers on this hole should be flashed with sand. They are not m good condition and make the hole look ragged' ASFN Notes on right side bunker 'flash' greenside edge ASFN Notes on front greenside bunker sketch - 'flash 3 to 5" (lips onto green) Design principles were then derived from the key words and phrases contained within each category/sub-category groups, as demonstrated in Example 4. Example 4 BUNKERS (B): AESTHETICS DESIGN PRINCIPLES • Horizon lines should be rolling and varied and should tie 'gracefully' into surrounding terrain. • Bunker edges should be made to look as natural as possible. • Flash sand up slopes of bunkers to make them visible. 2.5.4 DOCUMENTATION Each analyzed sub-category contributed at least one design principle to its related "indigenous category". A comprehensive listing of all design principles has been assembled in Figures 9-12. Principles have been recorded under their "analyst- constructed" sub-category within their related "indigenous category". Pg48 FIGURE 9: THOMPSON PRINCIPLES DISTILLED FROM PRIMARY SOURCES INCLUDING: OVERRIDING, SITE SELECTION & ROUTING PRINCIPLES CATEGORY: OVERRIDING PRINCIPLES: • "The most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the "duffer", while adding to the enjoyment of both." • "Nature must always be the architect's model". CATEGORY: SITE SELECTION SUBCATEGORY: FUNCTION PRINCIPLES: • The chemical and physical character of the soil is of the utmost importance. • The site should be readily accessible. • The selected site should be at least 130 acres in order to work in natural features. SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETIC PRINCIPLES: • Sites that exhibit a variety of topography (generally suitable to golf), natural systems (shores, valleys, farm & woodlands) and water features (streams, rivers, ponds), are preferred. • Sites and surrounding vistas should be aesthetically pleasing/picturesque. • The natural beauty of a site is important, yet artificial features can be made to appear natural. CATEGORY: ROUTING SUBCATEGORY: FUNCTION PRINCIPLES: • First and tenth holes should be located in close proximity to the clubhouse. SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Courses should measure between 6,000-6,600 yards. • Courses should start off on an easy par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion. • The variety in length and difficulty of holes should be evenly distributed throughout the round. The hardest hole should be integrated into the back nine and the second hardest hole should appear no earlier than midway through the front nine. • The most challenging holes on the course should not be challenging solely based on length; rather they require careful consideration of prevailing wind, grades and other local conditions as well. • Three or four par 3s should be interspersed throughout the round, but not near the beginning or end of a round. • Each shot in the game should be planned and every hole should be different from the one that preceded it. • The finish should be long and difficult and finishing holes should not face into the setting sun (west). Pg49 FIGURE 10: THOMPSON PRINCIPLES DISTILLED FROM PRIMARY SOURCES, INCLUDING: PRINCIPLES FOR BUNKERS AND GREENS DESIGNS CATEGORY: BUNKERS SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Horizon lines should be long, rolling and varied and should tie gracefully into surrounding terrain. • Bunker edges should be made to look as natural as possible. • Bunkers should be visible. SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Bunkering should be placed to create strategy and character of a hole, but a route should be left accessible for the lesser player. • Bunkers farthest from the green should allow the easiest recovery; bunkers should become progressively more challenging the closer they are positioned to the green. • A "carry bunker" placed strategically through the fairway to turn a hole is the exception and should be steep faced requiring explosive recovery shots. • Greenside bunkers can vary in depth and character, but one should never be able to putt from them. • Bunkers should be sanded at a 6" to 8" depth. SUBCATEGORY: MAINTENANCE PRINCIPLE: • Slopes of fairway and greenside bunkers should be long and gentle to permit mechanical mowing. CATEGORY: GREEN SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Contours of the green surface and surrounds should be long and must tie gracefully with surrounding contours and setting. • Mounding in the green complex can sometimes reflect the form and character of its surrounding landscape. • In general, green surfaces should be visible (sloped back to front), however, some blind green-sites add to the charm of a hole. Efforts should be made to ensure that blind shots are safe for the players. SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Greens should exhibit variety and character in the surfaces contours and should be at least 70% pinnable. • Courses should average 6,000 sq ft per green, totaling 110,000 sq ft of putting surface. Individual green sizes will vary according to the length of the approach shot. • Greens should be oriented to face the shot. SUBCATEGORY: MAINTENANCE PRINCIPLES: • Long slopes to permit ease of mowing. • Ensure adequate afternoon sun on greens. Pg50 FIGURE 11: THOMPSON PRINCIPLES DISTILLED FROM PRIMARY SOURCES INCLUDING: PRINCIPLES FOR FAIRWAYS, ROUGH, TEES & WATER FEATURES CATEGORY: FAIRWAYS SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Fairways should average 60-65 yards in width. • Level/smooth surface contours in areas of the fairway that make it equitable for the average player or that reward an optimal shot. • Remove natural elements that impede strategy or present a hazard to golfers. • Those who leave the straight and narrow path should be penalized. CATEGORY: ROUGH SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Rough to extend for 75 yards in front of the back tee and 10 yards to the sides of fairways and around greens. CATEGORY: TEES SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Teeing area should be 1800-3000 sq ft on average and will depend on the length of the hole. • Teeing area should be split into two or three areas. • Where necessary, tees should be raised to improve visibility. SUBCATEGORY: MAINTENANCE PRINCIPLES: • Ensure maintainable slopes. CATEGORY: WATER FEATURES SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Water features should be left in their natural state, unless slope stabilization is necessary. SUBCATEGORY: PLAYABILITY PRINCIPLES: • Water features should be visible. Pg51 FIGURE 12: THOMPSON PRINCIPLES DISTILLED FROM PRIMARY SOURCES INCLUDING: GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PRINCIPLES FOR LANDSCAPING, SITE FURNISHINGS AND VEGETATION CATEGORY: LANDSCAPING SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Landscaping should be used to enhance the aesthetic quality of key course elements such as the clubhouse, first tee, 18th green and practice tee and green. CATEGORY: PATHS & FURNISHINGS SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Site furnishings to exhibit a natural aesthetic. • Paths from green to tee should meander and lack formality. CATEGORY: VEGETATION SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Underbrush and windfalls should be cleared for 30' back from the fairway; otherwise brush should be left in its natural state. • Trees bordering fairways should be planted in clumps and not rows to define the fairway and hide undesirable views. • Branches of existing vegetation should be left feathered down to the ground. • Clearing should be strategic in order to capture and frame views. CATEGORY: GENERAL SUBCATEGORY: AESTHETICS PRINCIPLES: • Drainage must always be considered. • The beauty of the landscape should always be protected. Pg52 t 2.6 CHAPTER SUMMARY The objectives of CHAPTER | two were twofold; to establish Stanley Thompson as a significant figure in Canadian cultural history and to distill design principles from Thompson's thoughts and philosophies on golf course architecture. Thompson's importance to Canadian cultural history was established in this chapter by defining the historical context for Thompson's career and demonstrating his contributions to and influence in the field of golf course architecture. His design principles were then distilled using an interpretive method of historical research. The results of this chapter are completely distinct from the work that will be presented in CHAPTER| three, yet the historical context and design principles created in CHAPTER| two will be integrated with the conservation framework developed in CHAPTER | three to create guidelines for the inventory and evaluation of Stanley Thompson's golf courses in CHAPTER | four. Pg53 CHAPTER I three HERITAGE CONSERVATION FRAMEWORK DEVELOPMENT 3.0 INTRODUCTION The purpose of this chapter is to develop a framework grounded in heritage conservation theory and practice that can be used as a structure that will form the basis for guidelines developed to inventory and evaluate Stanley Thompson golf courses, as presented in CHAPTER | four. CHAPTER | three, Part I begins with a discussion of concepts from heritage conservation related to the assessment of cultural/historic landscapes based on literature from Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom. Part II provides a comparison of current conservation policies and best practices from those countries in order to identify approaches that are most appropriate for the purposes of developing a conservation framework. Finally, in Part III a conservation framework is outlined and methodologies used to define the framework are described. PART I: REVIEW OF LITERATURE RELATED TO THE ASSESSMENT OF CULTURAL LANDSCAPES 3.1 INTRODUCTION Parks Canada (2003) states, conservation consists of "all actions or processes that are aimed at safeguarding the character-defining elements of a cultural resource, so as to retain its heritage value and extend its physical life" (pg2). Pg54 The focus of this thesis research is to develop guidelines that are capable of identifying all features of an original Thompson design and then to evaluate extant features to determine whether they continue to convey the significance of the original design. Guidelines for evaluating Thompson's courses will be grounded in heritage conservation theory through a conservation framework that will be developed herein. In order to develop a reliable framework, it is important to start by considering all relevant concepts related to the assessment of heritage properties. Part I of this chapter is presented as two sections: SECTION A | theory Section A focuses on the theoretical underpinnings of cultural landscape assessment with discussions that define cultural landscapes and positioning golf courses within this context. Concepts of significance and integrity are also discussed. SECTION B| assessment process Section B describes the process of cultural landscape assessment, including types of relevant inventory, assessment of existing conditions, evaluating integrity and documenting findings. Treatment and establishment of priorities are also discussed. Pg55 SECTION AI theory 3.2 LANDSCAPES VS CULTURAL LANDSCAPES The Council of Europe (2000) has adopted the term "landscape" to describe "an area, as perceived by people, whose character is the result of the actions and interactions of natural and/or human factors" (as cited in Swanwick 2002a, p2). In the United Kingdom (U.K.) specifically, landscape is considered to be "an idea not a thing" that is "constructed by our minds and emotions" (Swanwick 2002a, p2). Landscape assessment in the U.K. addresses a broad spectrum of landscape types from rural farmlands to urban wastelands and is not reserved solely for special places (Swanwick 2002a). In contrast, the United States (U.S.) uses the term "cultural landscape" when refering to "settings that human beings have created in the natural world...special places...expressions of human manipulation and adaptation of the land" (Page 2001, pi). These landscapes are considered integral to historic preservation not only in the United States, but also globally as a result of their ability to reflect "history, cultural richness, development patterns and changing relationships between people and the environment" (Page, Gilbert & Dolan 1998, p7). Unlike the methodologies reviewed from the U.K., cultural landscape assessment in the U.S. is reserved for special places and considers historic landscape types like historic sites, historic designed landscapes, historic vernacular landscapes and ethnographic landscapes (Page et al. 1998, p9). Pg56 3.2.1 POSITIONING GOLF COURSES WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF CULTURAL LANDSCAPES Historic designed landscapes are a type of cultural landscape, defined by Keller & Keller (n.d.) in the United States National Register Bulletin 18 as: A landscape significant as a work of art; was consciously designed and laid out either by a master gardener, landscape architect, architect, or horticulturalist to a design principle, or by an owner or other amateur according to a recognized style or tradition; has a historical association with the significant person, trend or movement in landscape gardening or architecture, or a significant relationship to the theory or practice of landscape architecture (as cited in Page 2001, p60) This category is extensive and includes sub-category types that range from "small residential grounds" to "zoological gardens and parks" to "commercial and industrial grounds" (Keller & Keller, n.d., p2). According to Keller & Keller (n.d.) development of these sub-categories was intended to allow for "similar types of designed landscapes...[to] be evaluated according to the same criteria" (p2). Golf courses are considered within a sub-category called "grounds designed or developed for outdoor recreation and/or sports activities" (Keller & Keller n.d., p2), and are grouped with various other sport and recreation venues such as race tracks, bridle paths, stadiums, baseball parks, tennis courts & bowling greens (Keller & Keller n.d.). Pg57 It is curious that these activities would be grouped into this sub-category where they could presumably be assessed based on the same criteria, when they have nothing in common other than a sporting or recreational use. Almost all venues listed are constructed according to a specific set of dimensions and specifications that are primarily functional and conform to the rules of the related game or sport. By contrast, the only quality of a golf course that is in any way consistent from one to the next is the number of holes (9,18, 27 or 36). The composition and complexities of each are unique given the personality and complexion of the terrain and they exhibit aesthetic and stylistic qualities that uniquely define the vision of their creator. More recently, U.S. National Park Service Environment Protection Specialist Kevin Mendik (2007) acknowledged historic golf courses as distinct from other historic sites within the National Park System for several reasons. He says that one reason historic golf courses are unique is because they do not necessarily subscribe to a guiding philosophy such as the "Organic Act' (p2), which serves to outline the following "primary mission" (p3) of the National Parks Service. To conserve the scenery and the natural and historic objects and the wildlife therein and to provide for the enjoyment of the same in such a manner and by such means as will leave them unimpaired for the enjoyment of future generations {as cited in Mendik 2007, p3) Pg58 In addition, Mendik (2007) indicates that historic golf courses are not required to undertake the same rigorous processes in terms of environmental compliance and planning processes prior to alteration as other historic landscapes within the U.S. National Parks System. At the same time though, historic golf courses are not entitled to the same benefits as other historic resources, such as those within the National Park System, including funding and other forms of assistance (Mendik 2007). Mendik (2007) states that at present "there is simply no unifying set of guidelines for golf courses, public or private" (p3). It is for this reason that specific guidelines are needed to assess historic golf courses, not only to address the individual and unique nature of historic golf courses, but also to provide a finer level of detail that recognizes elements of a specific golf course architect's design, in this case Stanley Thompson, which make it unique and special. Pg59 3.3 SIGNIFICANCE Significance is defined on Dictionary.com [a] (n.d.) as "a meaning that is expressed". In the field of heritage conservation, meaning is expressed through intrinsic qualities of a cultural landscape to which individuals, cultures or societies associate value (Keller & Keller n.d., Municipal Heritage Partnership Program (MHPP) n.d.). The qualities that express meaning of the place form an integral connection to the past and as a result provide a basis for assessing its significance (Parks Canada 2003, Butterill 2006). Cultural landscapes can be valued for various reasons (Figure 13) depending on the jurisdiction. For example, the British consider landscapes for their aesthetic, habitat, cultural record, social and community, economic values (Swanwick 2002), meanwhile in the United States cultural landscapes are valued for their importance to "American history, architecture, archeology, engineering and culture" (Page 2001, p5l, also noted in Andrus 1997; McClelland, Shull & Charleston 1997; Keller & Keller n.d.). At the national level in Canada, cultural landscapes are considered important because of their aesthetic, historic, scientific, cultural, social or spiritual values (Parks Canada 2003) and in Alberta (the only provincial policies reviewed), landscapes can demonstrate importance to "history, architecture, archeology, paleontology, engineering or culture" (MHPP n.d. p6) Pg60 .J < >- UJ 13 CC >• <_) o ID o Z3 13 2 -J O VI CC O -j UJ UJ d >- t- UJ < O cc o Ul cc 2 (_> X UJ UJ 3 2 5 O (- t- 2 O 2 cc X t! ID m l- UJ Ul X o 2 m —J a. u u 3 u u < en U UJ < I < to to CC UJ < < UNITED KINGDOM O O o O UNITED STATES o o o o o CANADA (NATIONAL) O o o o o PROVINCE OF ALBERTA o o o o o o Figure 13: Value classifications for cultural landscapes Evaluating the significance of a cultural landscape requires first identifying those qualities that express the meaning for which a property is valued and then establishing whether, how and to what degree the property continues to express that meaning and thus conveys its significance (MHPP n.d.). Significance is normally evaluated based on one or more significance criteria and within an appropriate historic context (MHPP n.d., Page 2001, Andrus 1997). Sections 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 will address each respectively. 3.3.1 SIGNIFICANCE CRITERIA Canadian (MHPP n.d.) and United States (Page 2001, Andrus 1997) policies agree that significance criteria define the reason(s) why a particular cultural landscape is valued and is therefore eligible for recognition by relevant government agencies. These criteria provide a foundation for a historical context and a basis for evaluating the significance Pg61 of the resource. Typically, cultural landscapes must meet at least one of the following significance criteria in order to warrant evaluation (MHPP n.d.. Page 2001, Andrus 1997). CRITERION A: ...recognizes properties that have a direct connection to an event, repeated activities, historical trends or themes, or cultural practices that have contributed significantly to "broad patterns of history" (Page 2001, Page et al. 1998, Andrus 1997, MHPP n.d.). CRITERION B: ...recognizes cultural landscapes that demonstrate a definitive association with "the lives of persons significant in our past" (Page 2001, p5l, Andrus 1997 as cited in Page et al. 1998, p7l) and more specifically with their "productive life" (MHPP n.d., p9) in the period when they became important in history (Page 2001, Page et al. 1998, Andrus 1997, MHPP n.d.). CRITERION C: ...recognizes properties that exemplify the "distinctive characteristics of a type, period, or method of construction or represents the work of a master, or possesses high artistic values, or represents a significant and distinguishable entity" (Page 2001, p51, Andrus 1997 as cited in Page et al. 1998, p69, MHPP n.d., p6) Pg62 CRITERION D: ...recognizes cultural landscapes that have the potential to provide important information about the history of a society by revealing new theories of its evolution (Page 2001, Page et al. 1998, Andrus 1997, MHPP n.d.). In the Province of Alberta an additional criterion is considered. CRITERION E recognizes properties that are "prominent or conspicuous, and... have acquired special visual, sentimental or symbolic values that transcend its function" (MHPP n.d., p7). 3.3.1.1 SIGNIFICANCE CRITERIA RELEVANT TO STANLEY THOMPSON'S WORK Although a number of significance criteria are relevant in exploring Thompson's contributions, Criterion C stands out as the most pertinent to the focus of this thesis research because it relates to the conservation of his built works, which are a translation of his design philosophies and a demonstration of his skill as a "master" in the field of golf course architecture. A "master" can be defined as one who is "eminently skilled in something" (Dictionary.com [b] n.d.). Thompson's skill, artistry and ingenuity in the field of golf course architecture have not only been recognized by the governing bodies of golf in Canada, but also by the Canadian government, as demonstrated in CHAPTER| two, Section 2.3 (STANLEY THOMPSON'S CONTRIBUTION AND INFLUENCE). Although significance criteria are typically used in the assessment of historic properties bound for official recognition (e.g. nomination to Historic Places in Canada or the National Register of Historic Places) (Page 2001, Page et al. 1998, Andrus 1997, MHPP n.d.), Pg63 this thesis research does not advocate for designation necessarily. The conservation framework developed herein will simply follow this process of assessment as it provides a comprehensive methodology upon which to base the guideline structure that will be developed in CHAPTER | four. 3.3.2 HISTORIC CONTEXT Robert Page (2001) describes the term "historic context" as "an organizing structure for interpreting history that groups historic properties that share a common theme, geographic location and period of time" (p58). Patrick Andrus (1997) suggests that a principle consideration of the historical context is that no cultural landscape evolves in a vacuum, therefore common themes or patterns can provide a framework for "comparative analysis" (Page 2001, p58). This provides for the significance of a cultural landscape to be evaluated in comparison with others exhibiting similar characteristics (Page 2001, Page et a 1.1998). A historic context is developed using various methods depending on the agency involved. For instance, the Province of Alberta uses a series of questions (MHPP n.d.), while the United States National Park Service (NPS) focuses on establishing an appropriate theme (Andrus 1997, Page et al. 1998, Page 2001) to describe the historic context of a cultural landscape. The NPS literature elaborates, explaining that this thematic classification system has been evolving since 1936 in the United States through academic (Andrus 1997) and historical resource studies (Page etai. 1998) as a means of ensuring Pg64 that the "full diversity of American history and prehistory is expressed" (Pageetai. i998,p58) through their examination of historic properties (Page 2001). Regardless of the approach, each agency (Province of Alberta and the National Park Service) focuses the historical context by first selecting at least one significance criterion for the evaluation (MHPP n.d., Andrus 1997, Page et al. 1998, Page 2001). To develop a historical context under Criterion C, both the Province of Alberta and the U.S. National Park Service guidelines recommend that facts be provided about the "career" (MHPP n.d., p7, Page 2001, p59) and "work" (Page 2001, p59) of the individual "to explain how the person was accomplished in his or her field and made contributions to the art, landscape architecture" (MHPP n.d., p7. Page 2001, p59) "Architecture" (MHPP n.d., p7) "or design" (Page 2001, p59) of the province in the case of Alberta or "of the community, state or nation" (Page 2001, p59) in the case of the National Park Service. 3.3.2.1 HISTORIC CONTEXT RELEVANT TO STANLEY THOMPSON'S WORK Based on the guideline outlined by the Province of Alberta and the National Park Service in the previous section the historical context for Stanley Thompson's work has already been defined in CHAPTER | two, Sections 2.2 and 2.3 of this thesis research. Pg65 3.3.3. HIERARCHY FOR EVALUATING SIGNIFICANCE Page (2001) describes an "area of significance" as the area in which a cultural landscape contributes to the "broader patterns of... history, architecture, archeology, engineering and culture" (p56). Of the ten "areas" that commonly apply to cultural landscapes (Page 2001), landscape architecture is most relevant to this thesis research because the same description used by NPS literature to define landscape architecture, "the practical art of designing or arranging the land for human use and enjoyment" (Page 2001, p62) can also apply to golf course architecture. In the National Park System, themes and patterns related to the physical characteristics, association or use of the property have a hierarchical relationship with the area of significance and form the means by which the property can ultimately be understood and its historic significance evaluated (Page 2001, Page etal. 1998). As this relates to this thesis research, Thompson himself is the common thread or theme throughout his body of work. His philosophies of design form patterns that provide commonality throughout his body of work. These patterns become recognizable within a golf course landscape as design features that reflect his design philosophies (hierarchical relationship, Figure 14). Since these features are evidence of Thompson's design ideas translated to the natural landscape, it is their existence, condition and visibility within the landscape that establishes the historical significance of the golf course. According to Page (2001) historic significance provides a "foundation for Pg66 decisions about planning, identification, ARCHITECTURE (Category of Significance) evaluation, registration and treatment of historic properties" (p58). LANDSCAPE/ GOLF COURSE 3.3.4 PERIOD OF SIGNIFICANCE ARCHITECTURE (Area of Significance) Page (2001) describes a period of significance as a "length of time when a property was associated with the important event, STANLEY THOMPSON (Theme) activities or persons" (p53) or when it "achieved the character on which significance was based" ST DESIGN PRINCIPLES (p56). This period can vary depending on the (Pattern) significance criteria for which the cultural landscape is being evaluated. For instance in the FEATURES OF THE GC case of a property assessed on the basis of its (Element) architecture or design (Criterion C), as is the case Figure 14: Hierarchy relationship for significance for a Stanley Thompson designed golf course, a period of significance can describe the duration of the original construction or any subsequent alterations and/or additions by that significant individual. Page (2001) suggests that for a property to retain its significance it must not only possess integrity for the original period of significance, but also for all other significant periods that have been documented (Page 2001). Pg67 SECTION B| assessment process Assessment of a historical property requires that original and extant features of a cultural landscape be identified and then compared to determine whether the site retains its historical integrity and as a result continues to convey its significance (Page 2001). This process is a crucial first step in the conservation process to establish priorities and strategies for future treatment of the cultural resource (Parks Canada 2003). CHAPTER | three, Sections 3.4 to 3.8 describe concepts fundamental to this process that have been derived from literature surrounding conservation practices in Canada and the United States. 3.4 INVENTORY OF ORIGINAL SITE FEATURES AND ELEMENTS Section 3.4 discusses considerations for and the process of collecting inventory and documenting the chronological evolution of cultural landscape overtime. 3.4.1 SCALE The first thing to be considered when collecting inventory on a historic property is the scale of the site. Understanding the scale of the site can assist in organizing inventory and ensuring that the search is conducted at an appropriate resolution (Page 2001). According to Page (2001) cultural landscapes can exist in a variety of shapes and sizes. Therefore, methods for assessing them must be flexible to accommodate a range Pg68 of scales, yet must provide appropriate resolution so that all characteristics and features within the landscape can be documented (Page 2001). The U.S. National Park Service's Cultural Landscape Inventory Professional Procedures Guide (CLI) addresses the issue of scale specifically by providing a hierarchical approach to analyzing a site. This method sub-divides a cultural landscape into what are referred to as property levels. A hierarchy of landscape, landscape feature, component landscape and/or component landscape feature levels ensure that all "character and physical aspects" of the site can be appropriately identified and evaluated (Page 2001, p33). "Landscape level" refers to the aggregate of "component landscapes and/or features" (Page 2001, pio)that characterize a property and in the case of the CLI, make it eligible for the U.S. National Register of Historic Places. Page (2001) indicates that this property level can apply to any cultural landscape regardless of its size. For example, a half-acre urban park can be considered at the landscape level, as can a 2500-acre national park. As a result, landscape scale is the most common and important level for evaluation in the U.S. National Park Service inventory process (Page 2001). Depending on their size, cultural landscapes are then further sub-divided into component landscape and component landscape feature levels in the case of a larger property, or simply into the landscape feature level for smaller sites. Pg69 "Component Landscapes" refer to areas of the property that could be considered significant in their own right if evaluated independently from the overall landscape and that can be dissected again to highlight smaller elements (Page 2001). "Component Landscape Features" refer to the smallest elements of a component landscape that contribute to expressing its significance (Page 2001). "Landscape Features" refer to the smallest elements of a cultural landscape that contribute to its significance and can be managed independently (Page 2001). 3.4.2 LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS & CHARACTER-DEFINING ELEMENTS 3.4.2.1 TERMINOLOGY Robert Page (2001), author and co-author of the National Park Service Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide (2001) and A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques (1998) respectively, says that there are inconsistencies in the vocabulary used within the field of heritage conservation that can cause confusion. Differences in definitions used to describe the term "character-defining elements" can provide an example with implications relevant to this thesis research. Pg70 In Canada, both Parks Canada and the province of Alberta use the term character-defining element to describe, "the materials, form, location and spatial configurations that contribute to the significance of a resource, and which must be retained in order to preserve its heritage value" (MHPP n.d., pii, Parks Canada 2003). This term has also been used by the United States National Park Service (NPS) in the past, but with a slightly different meaning. The NPS defines character-defining element as "cultural and natural processes and physical forms that comprise the appearance of the landscape" (Page 2001, p25). The difference being that the United States uses the term to describe the general character of the landscape, while Canadian agencies use it to identify more specific qualities that must remain visible within the landscape in order for it to continue to convey its significance. The previous example is not an anomaly. Discrepancies like this seem to exist throughout the heritage conservation lexicon. Another example can be found within the glossary used by the U.S. National Park Service itself. Previous to the label "character- defining elements" the definition presented in the previous paragraph was also labeled using the terms landscape components, landscape features and landscape characteristics at one point or another throughout history (Page 2001). The term landscape characteristic is now defined in the United States as "the tangible and intangible aspects of a landscape from the historical period, which define and characterize the landscape and which, individually and collectively, give a landscape Pg71 character and aid in understanding its cultural values" (Page 2001, p26). This definition appears to be more specific than their previous definition of character-defining elements, but is still relatively general in that it does not address features of the landscape that contribute to its significance specifically, as does the Canadian definition for character-defining elements. This thesis research will adopt both concepts in an effort to ensure that a comprehensive examination of the site can be conducted and that all original features of a Stanley Thompson designed golf course that are a reflection of his principles as translated to the landscape can be identified and defined. 3.4.2.2 LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS & CHARACTER-DEFINING ELEMENTS The U.S. National Park Service provides a comprehensive classification system for landscape assessment that examines a site based on fourteen landscape characteristic categories, including: Natural systems and features, spatial organization, land use, cultural traditions, cluster arrangements, circulation, topography, vegetation, buildings and structures, views and vistas, constructed water features, small scale features and archeological features (Page et al. 1998, Page 2001). Page's (2001) definition for each is present in Figures 15 A & B. According to the U.S. National Park Service, landscape characteristics can range from broad patterns of a region to finer details of a site that can either be recognized for Pg72 FIGURE 15A LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS composition and materials or for NATURAL SYSTEMS AND FEATURES: refer to aspects of obscure qualities like meaning, the natural environment, such as hydrology, geology, geomorphology, ecology, climate and native vegetation, capable of affecting the physical perception or association. form of a landscape (Page 2001). Landscape characteristics are not SPATIAL ORGANIZATION: Refers to the three- dimensional configuration of elements that define always explicit, nor do they all exist space and create "visual associations in the landscape" (Page 2001, P28). within every property. For example, LAND USE: refers to the historical human activities that have shaped the landscape (Page 2001). constructed water features are CULTURAL TRADITIONS: refers to the materials, built form, land use patterns and stylistic preferences listed as a landscape characteristic associated with a specific group that are visible on the landscape (Page200i). by the U.S. National Park Service, CIRCULATION: refers to the materials, alignment and profile of the "systems of movement in the but may not exist within a golf landscape" (Page 2001, p28). course landscape. It is therefore TOPOGRAPHY: refers to "the three-dimensional configuration of the landscape surface characterized by features (e.g. slope and important to identify the landscape articulation) and orientation (e.g. elevation and solar aspect)" (Page 2001, p28). characteristics that do exist and VEGETATION: refers to "individual and aggregate plant features of deciduous and evergreen trees, examine the relationships between shrubs, vines, ground covers and herbaceous plants, and plant communities, whether indigenous them so that the history and or introduced" (Page 2001, p28). complexities of the property can be BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES: buildings refer to constructed elements within a landscape that shelter human activity. Elements constructed for fully understood (Page et al. 1998, Page non-human activities are referred to as shelters (Page 2001). 2001). For the purposes of this research landscape characteristic categories will organize the inventory process and will provide a checklist to ensure that all general aspects of the landscape are contemplated throughout the examination of the site. Pg73 Character-defining elements on FIGURE 15B LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS CON'T CLUSTER ARRANGEMENTS: Patterns of built form in the the other hand are specific landscape (Page 2001) tangible and non-tangible VIEWS AND VISTAS: "Prospect created by a range of vision in the cultural landscape, conferred by other features that provide evidence of landscape characteristics" (Page 2001, p29). More specifically VIEWS refer to a "broad range of vision" Thompson's design philosophies that can occur naturally or deliberately, while a vista refers to a contrived "discrete, linear range of translated to the natural Vision" (Page 2001, p29). CONSTRUCTED WATER FEATURES: features or elements landscape. The process of constructed in the landscape to serve functional or aesthetic purposes (Page 2001). identifying those specific features SMALL SCALE FEATURES: "the elements that provide using Thompson's design detail and diversity for both functional need and aesthetic concerns in the landscape" (Page 2001, p29) principles is described as part of ARCHEOLOGICAL FEATURES: "location of ruins, traces, or deposited artifacts in the landscape evidenced Chapter| four, Section 4.5 (SITE by the presence of surface or subsurface features" (Page 2001, p29) HISTORY AND INVENTORY). This inventory of original features will form the baseline against which changes are measured, existing conditions are compared and integrity and significance of the golf course (at present) are evaluated. This is an important reference point, particularly with cultural landscapes since they are inherently dynamic and can therefore be affected by human influence and natural force, which can result in a compromised state of significance (Page 2001, MHPP n.d.). The Municipal Heritage Partnership Program in Alberta indicates that it is not necessary for all original features of the landscape to remain intact in order for the property to convey its meaning, but they suggest most Pg74 qualities that are essential to expressing the "historical identity' should be reasonably visible (MHPP n.d., pi2). 3.4.3 CHRONOLOGY & PHYSICAL HISTORY According to Page (2001), tracing the chronological evolution of a cultural landscape requires identifying and describing all "major events" that impacted the physical developmental history of the property. A timeline and narrative of each can provide valuable insight into the existence and conditions of extant features that will be catalogued as part of the existing conditions assessment (Page 2001). In the context of a Thompson course, the scope of these major events might include additions, alterations, renovations, redesigns, re-grading, ecological restoration, expansion (e.g. from 9 to 18 or 18 to 27 holes) or stabilization. 3.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A comprehensive inventory of existing conditions is an extremely important step in the assessment process (Page 2001), particularly for a designed historic landscape such as a Thompson golf course. According to Page (2001) this section of the process should allow the evaluator to identify all existing features and elements of the design, describe the character (e.g. size, shape, placement, orientation, proximity to other features, etc.) of each and then assess conditions of the site using a combination of research and field inventory (Page 2001). Pg75 The U.S. National Park Service has developed a rating system that is based on their manual Management Plan Guidelines and Software (1994). The system rates the condition of the site in its entirety, based on the amount of disturbance that is visible and then provides a recommended course of action (Page 2001). For example: Properties in GOOD condition demonstrate "no clear evidence of major negative disturbance and deterioration by natural and/or human forces...Cultural and natural values are as well preserved as can be expected under the given environmental conditions" (Page 2001, p69). Properties in FAIR condition demonstrate "evidence of minor disturbance and deterioration by natural and/or human forces and some degree of corrective action is needed within 3-5 years to prevent further harm to its cultural and natural values" (Page 2001, p69). Properties in POOR conditions demonstrate "clear evidence of major disturbance and rapid deterioration by natural and/or human forces. Immediate corrective action is required to protect and preserve the remaining historical and natural values" (Page 2001, P69) Pg76 3.6 HISTORIC INTEGRITY Much of the North American literature agrees that historic integrity reflects the ability of a cultural landscape "to convey its significance" (MHPP n.d., pll; Page et al. 1998, p71, and Page 2001, p79). Earlier in Section 3.3, significance was described as a link to the past (Parks Canada 2003, Butteriii 2006) that is "expressed through intrinsic qualities of a cultural landscape to which individuals, cultures or societies associate value" (Keller & Keller n.d., MHPP n.d.). The intrinsic qualities are therefore what need to persist in order for the site to retain its integrity and convey its significance. Intrinsic qualities of a site can vary depending on the significance criteria (CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.1) under which the property is being evaluated as well as on themes and patterns (CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.3) inherent within the landscape. For example, this thesis suggests that a Stanley Thompson golf course would be evaluated under Criterion C, as the work of a master and for its design quality (as described in CHAPTER| three, Section 3.3.1.1). As a result, the features and elements designed as a translation of Thompson principles in the original golf course design are the intrinsic qualities that must remain in order for the course to retain integrity and convey significance. Pg77 3.6.1 ASSESSING HISTORIC INTEGRITY Integrity is assessed through a comparison of original and extant features, to determine whether and to what degree the original fabric of the property continues to persist. The severity and reversibility of any changes are then considered to assess whether the intrinsic qualities of the original design could ever be re-established (Page 2001, Page et al. 1998). In the United States, integrity is assessed based on seven aspects including location, design, environment, materials, workmanship, feeling and association (Pageet al. 1998, Page 2001, Birnbaum & Peters 1997). Canadian literature outlines a similar set of aspects except the term "setting" is used in place of "environment" (MHPP n.d.). A brief description of each of the seven aspects follows, with further clarification included in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.7.2.1. 3.6.1.1 INTEGRITY OF LOCATION Location relates to fixed geographical coordinates that position a resource. Assessment of location requires recognizing the relationship that exists between site and resource and understanding the inherent "historical associations" that would be lost were the resource to be moved (MHPP n.d., pi3). Landscape characteristics such as the boundaries, vegetation and "the evidence of response to natural systems and features" would be noticeably impacted with such a loss of integrity (Page 2001, p79). Pg78 3.6.1.2 INTEGRITY OF DESIGN Integrity of design considers the designer's vision for the property as expressed through the composition and detail of characteristics and elements within the site (MHPP n.d.). Assessment of design integrity can relate to spatial organization, buildings and structures, circulation, clusters, vegetation, small-scale features and land use characteristics (Page 2001). 3.6.1.3 INTEGRITY OF ENVIRONMENT/SETTING Environment refers to the "physical setting" or the "character of the place" (MHPP n.d., pi4). Landscape characteristics most closely related and that might be impacted in order to effect the integrity of environment can include boundaries, natural systems and features (Page 2001), small-scale elements, vegetation (MHPP n.d., Page200i), spatial organization and topography (MHPP n.d.). 3.6.1.4 INTEGRITY OF MATERIALS Materials refer to the "physical elements that were combined or deposited during a particular period(s) or time frame and in a particular pattern or configuration to form a historic resource" (MHPP n.d., pi4). Pg79 3.6.1.5 INTEGRITY OF FEELING Feeling refers to the ability of a resource to communicate "the aesthetic or historic sense of a particular period" through its features (MHPP n.d., pi5). This aspect of integrity is thought to have a strong connection to continued land use (Page 2001, p79). 3.6.1.6 INTEGRITY OF WORKMANSHIP Workmanship is considered to be "the physical evidence of the crafts of a particular culture or people" (MHPP n.d., pi4) from a specific era in history that demonstrates their unique principles and practices (MHPP n.d.). In the broad context of cultural landscapes characteristics exhibited can range from plain, basic and traditional, to ornamental, sophisticated and innovative (MHPP n.d.). 3.6.1.7 INTEGRITY OF ASSOCIATION Integrity of association refers to a direct and recognizable connection between the property and related person of significance (MHPP n.d.). In the National Park Service's Cultural Landscape Inventory Procedures Guide, Page (2001) writes, "decisions about integrity require professional judgment about whether a property today reflects the spatial organization, physical components, and historic associations that it attained during the period of significance (refer to CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.4). A property's period(s) of significance becomes the benchmark for measuring whether changes outside the period of significance contribute to or alter its integrity" (Page 2001, p79). Pg80 3.7 CONTRIBUTING AND NON-CONTRIBUTING FEATURES A contributing feature refers to "a physical attribute associated with a landscape characteristic that retains integrity and therefore contributes to the significance of the cultural landscape" (Page 2001, p29). Contributing "features" should not be confused with contributing "resources". An example of a contributing resource might be a historic building, because although as a component of the landscape it adds to the overall importance of the site, the structure itself could be considered historically significant on its OWn (Page 2001). The identification of contributing features through the inventory and evaluation process is important because it provides a point of initiation for future conservation and planning efforts. 3.8 DOCUMENTING & USING FINDINGS 3.8.1 STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE In the United States, the Statement of Significance (SOS) is designed to describe "the relationship between the cultural landscape and specific historic contexts, National Register Criteria and period(s) of significance" (Page et al. 1998, p7i. Page 2001). In Canada and the United States, an SOS is generally a standard part of the assessment of cultural landscapes, is undertaken as one of the final steps in the assessment process, and is developed based on the findings of the research (Butteriii 2006, Page 2001, Page et al. 1998). Literature from both countries considers the SOS to form an integral link between Pg8l nomination and subsequent planning, intervention and management of a cultural resource (Butteriii 2006, Page 2001). Page (2001) describes the organization of the SOS as a series of paragraphs beginning with a summary, followed by as many paragraphs as are required to support the opening statement. According to Page (2001) the opening statement should summarize the qualities of significance and integrity inherent in the cultural landscape. Therefore, the significance criteria under which the cultural landscape was evaluated should be identified and an argument should be presented for why and how the resource meets the criteria. This paragraph should also identify relevant area(s) of significance (CHAPTER| three, Section 3.3.3), themes and patterns (CHAPTER | three Section 3.3.3) and historical context (CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.2) related to the cultural landscape, focusing on the association, events, activities, trends, technologies or use related to its historical context that form the basis for evaluating its significance (Page 2001). Page (2001) suggests that supporting paragraphs provide the details, facts and evidence needed "to make the case for significance and integrity" (p53). They should describe history and evolution of the site by identifying the period(s) of significance (CHAPTER| three, Section 3.3.4) for the property and providing a summary of all major events, highlighting any significant impact to the property (Page 2001). In addition, they Pg82 should demonstrate how and why the Figure 16: NPS Guidelines to develop support for the Statement of Significance property is "unique, outstanding or A. "In what ways does the property physically reflect its period of strongly representative" (p53) of its significance, and in what ways does it reflect changes after the period of historic context by elaborating on the significance?" B. "What Is the period of significance based on?" themes, patterns and historic context C. "How have alterations such as...changes in foliage or topography affected the identified in the summary and by integrity of the site and its ability to convey its significant associations?" providing evidence of how those aspects D. "What are the physical features and characteristics that distinguish the property, including topography, land use, are visible within the natural landscape spatial organization, street patterns, structures and building materials" (Page 2001). E. "What are the origins and key events in the historical development of the property?" F. "Are any landscape architects, designers, The Cultural Landscape Inventory builders or planners important to the property's development?" G. "Does the property convey a sense of Professional Procedures Guide (CLI) cohesiveness through its design, setting, materials, workmanship, or association?" developed through the United States H. "HOW do elements within the property contribute to the feeling of time and place?" National Park Service has outlined a I. "If there are any preservation or restoration activities on the property, series of questions to guide the how do they affect the significance of the property?" development of a statement of J. "Does the property contain any resources outside of the period of significance that are contributing? If so, significance. Examples are presented in identify them and explain their importance" Figure 16 and will be adapted in CHAPTER| K. "Does the property have any resources of possible archeological significance? If so, four, Section 4.7.4 to assist in creating a how are they likely to yield important information? How do they relate to the prehistory or history of the property?" statement of significance for Stanley L "How have significant individuals-contributed to the Thompson golf courses that will be development of the property?" (Excerpt from Page 2001, p54-55) evaluated using the guidelines. Pg83 3.8.2 SUMMARY STATEMENT Once the statement of significance is complete a brief summary statement can be developed to outline extant characteristics and elements in the landscape. This provides a summary of the most important findings at a glance and can assist in identifying an appropriate management category and treatment options for the resource (Page et al. 1998). 3.8.3 GENERAL MANAGEMENT CATEGORIES According to Page (2001), management categories can assist in establishing direction for future treatment of a cultural resource. Management categories outlined in the CLI by Page (2001) include: Category A is labeled "must be preserved and maintained" (p30), indicating that actions to preserve and maintain the resource are required. Category B is labeled "should be preserved and maintained" (p30), suggesting that there could be conditions under which preservation and/or maintenance of the resource may not be required. Category C is labeled "may be preserved or maintained" (p30), indicating that preservation and/or maintenance are a possibility for that resource. Pg84 Category D is labeled "may be released, altered, or destroyed" (p30), meaning that the resource has lost all integrity and therefore treatment is of little concern. Management categories can contribute to guidelines created in CHAPTER| four, to provide a mechanism that would establish a fundamental philosophy for the golf course based on its significance (as determined through the assessment process) that would drive all planning and design decisions. 3.8.4 TREATMENT OPTIONS Treatment refers to actions taken in an effort to conserve a cultural resource and can include: preservation, rehabilitation, restoration, stabilization or rehabilitation (Page 2001). Although the guidelines developed in CHAPTER | four will not address treatment specifically, it is important to have a sense of the possible avenues for conservation from the outset of a project. Conservation priorities and objectives can be established in advance of the assessment, but a property may ultimately require a combination of conservation strategies to be employed, depending on the complexities of the site (Parks Canada 2003). Literature from Canada and the United States suggests that preservation refers to measures that can be implemented to retain the "existing form, integrity and material" (Page 2001, p72, Parks Canada 2003, pi). These measures focus more on ongoing Pg85 maintenance of what is already there rather than replacement of significant features (Page 2001). Rehabilitation allows a property to be retrofitted for "compatible use" (Page 2001, p72), but the literature suggests that a priority should be placed on preserving landscape elements that are integral to expressing cultural and historical values of the place (Page 2001, Parks Canada 2003). Restoration reinstates the "form, features and character" (Page 2001, p73) of a cultural landscape in order to regain the appearance of the place in a particular era. This can require removal of features that are not associated with the significant era and reconstruction of those that are (Page 2001, Parks Canada 2003). Stabilization refers to measures taken to retain the current form of a landscape element while addressing safety, damage or deterioration issues (Page 2001). Reconstruction refers to the use of new construction to replicate the "form, features and detailing" of a cultural resource in a specific era in its original location (Page 2001, p73). Although similar, this treatment differs from restoration in that reconstruction requires recreating the cultural resource from scratch, rather than altering forms that already exist, as is the case in restoration. Pg86 Graves & Cornish (1998) describe four treatment options commonly used in golf course architecture. The first option involves full reconstruction "with little or no reference to the existing layout" (pi27). This type of redevelopment typically involves alterations that facilitate the modern game of golf as played with the latest equipment technologies and is therefore labeled "modernization". The second option is restoration employing the same definition as above (described by Page 2001 and Parks Canada 2003). Graves & Cornish (1998) suggest that this is especially important to consider on courses that are "the creation of a widely recognized [golf course] architect" (pi27). The third option is "renovation or reconstruction", which entails "rebuilding and/or modifying all or some features, with the original and basic layout retained" (pi27). Ideally, this option would require a study be conducted to identify original features of the course and to determine whether they continue to persist within the landscape. In this way proposed alterations would consider sensitive treatment of extant features to ensure their preservation in the future. Finally, they suggest a fourth option that would consider a combination of treatments. Pg87 3.9 PART I SUMMARY Part I of this chapter was intended to provide an overview of basic concepts that are involved in assessing a cultural landscape, as well as to outline a process for inventory and evaluation of features. Part II of this investigation will review and compare assessment methods from Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom to determine which document(s) encapsulate all of the concepts addressed herein in order to provide a foundation for the guidelines presented in CHAPTER | four. Pg88 PARTII: SUMMARY AND COMPARISON OF ASSESSMENT METHODS 3.10 INTRODUCTION Part II of this chapter provides an overview and comparative analysis of methods used to assess cultural landscapes from Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom. The intent of the section is to first understand the similarities and differences that exist between approaches to evaluation in these three countries and then to select one or more methods that might be suitable to provide a base for the heritage conservation framework that will be developed in Part III of this chapter. The methodology used to summarize and compare documents is based on a similar academic study conducted in 1995 by Cecelia Paine and James Taylor, entitled Cultural Landscape Assessment: a Comparison of Current Methods and their Potential for Application within the Niagara Escarpment. Although the focus of that study was different, it provided an appropriate structure and methodology upon which to base a review and comparison in this section. 3.11 SCOPE Six cultural landscape assessment methods developed in Canada, the United States (U.S.) and the United Kingdom (UK) were selected for review and comparison. The original intent of this investigation was to review and compare approaches for assessment of cultural resources from a number of geographical regions from a variety Pg89 of sources (e.g. government: national, provincial, municipal; professional; and scholarly). However, as a result of the timeline for this thesis, the scope of the investigation was refined to focus on government-generated sources. Approaches range from guidelines developed specifically for assessing properties associated with a person of national significance and leading to designation, to strategies applicable to a broad range of cultural landscapes, which can be combined with other models to provide a comprehensive system of inventory and evaluation for the purposes of informing planning and management processes. These approaches are summarized in Appendix F. 3.12 APPROACH TO COMPARISON Two cultural landscape assessment methods from each of three countries were analyzed to understand more clearly the benefits and shortcomings within each system. Documents included: CANADA Cl Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada (HSMBC). (2001). Assessing Sites Associated with Persons of National Significance. C2 Municipal Heritage Partnership Program (MHPP). (N.D.). Evaluating Historic Resources in Alberta. UNITED STATES USl Page, Robert R. (2001). Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide. US2 Page, Robert R., Gilbert, Cathy A. and Dolan, Susan A. (1998). A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques. UNITED KINGDOM UKl Swanwick, Carys. [1] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland. UK2 Swanwick, Carys [2] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland, Topic Paper 5: Understanding Historic Landscape Character. Pg90 Each document was reviewed based on criteria similar to those used in the Paine & Taylor (1995) investigation, including: SOURCE, AUTHOR, DOCUMENT TITLE, DATE, LOCATION OF STUDY, STUDY SPONSOR, TYPE OF STUDY, SCALE, OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDEUNES, HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTIONS, CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES, DATA SOURCES, METHODOLOGIES, PURPOSE, TYPE OF RESULTS, DOCUMENTATION. A comparison of approaches can be found in Charts A & B. Pg91 rM rs O O O O r-j rs 00 o (T> IH" 5 CHARTA o CD o rH U U o •q Deeds & Surveys Planning Documents Video Government Inventories Digital Databases Digital Drawings (GIS/CAD) Drawings Field Survey: Maps & Checklists Photos Sketches Written Reports 3.13 FINDINGS OF COMPARISON 3.13.1. STUDY SPONSOR Each method reviewed was developed by government agencies at the national level within its respective countries except one. The approach created by the Province of Alberta was also selected for analysis because it provided the most comprehensive example of an evaluation strategy readily available within Canadian literature. All systems presented an expert-based approach in which specialists in areas of landscape architecture, history, heritage conservation, ecology and perhaps planning, would be consulted throughout the assessment process. 3.13.2 TYPE OF STUDY* (*Categories included in "Comparison of Methods", Charts A&B) The type of study considers the completeness (Comprehensive, Selective) and focus (Generic or Site specific) of the study. All systems were generic in focus, meaning that they were not tailored specifically for one site, but rather could be applied to a number of different landscapes. The guidelines from the Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada regarding properties associated with persons of national historic significance are considered by this comparison to be selective, as they assess only landscapes that exhibited certain associative qualities. However, the balance of the systems are considered comprehensive for the purposes of this review because they are designed to Pg94 address any cultural landscape, or in the case of the UK any landscape generally, that is of interest to the respective government agency. 3.13.3 SCALE & LEVEL OF DETAIL* North American approaches focus primarily on sub-regional and site scales and are capable of identifying and evaluating details of the landscape that contribute to its significance. Conversely, methods reviewed from the UK (Landscape Character Assessment (LCA), Historic Landscape Character (HLC) & Historic Landscape Assessment (HLA)) each addressed a broader scale and are designed primarily to highlight patterns in the landscape rather than focus on details. The Cultural Landscape Inventory (CLI) developed by the U.S. National Park Service is notable in this category for its method of subdividing cultural landscapes into what Page (2001) refers to as "property levels" (i.e. landscape, component landscape, landscape features and component landscape feature). This provides various levels of detail to ensure that the significance of the landscape is fully described. 3.13.4 LANDSCAPE TYPES* The U.S. National Park Service documents specifically address historic sites, historic designed landscape, historic vernacular landscapes and ethnographic landscapes. Pg95 At the national level in Canada the sources reviewed focused on landscapes significant as a result of their association and therefore referred indirectly to historic sites and historic designed landscapes. This is not to say that other landscape types are not addressed at the Canadian national level; however, none were used for the purposes of this evaluation. In the case of the Province of Alberta, literature refers to cultural resources, but does not refer directly to cultural landscapes, nor does it make a distinction between landscape types. In the UK an overwhelming majority of the land in England and Scotland was colonized over the years and has some elements of heritage embedded into it. The Landscape Character Assessment approach from the United Kingdom focuses on landscapes in general and does not distinguish between those that are historic or considered 'special' for some reason. The Historic Landscape Characterization (HLC) and Historic Land-use Assessment (HLA) documents do attempt to highlight historic aspects of the landscape, or changes therein, that have contributed to the current condition of the landscape. In general, North American approaches place an emphasis on preserving elements of a landscape that contribute to its historic significance, while the UK system regards the existing landscape as the priority and considers historical remnants in terms of how they have shaped the current landscape. Pg96 3.13.5. PURPOSE* Both Canadian approaches reviewed are geared primarily as tools to pursue recognition by the appropriate government agency (national or provincial) as a historic site. In contrast, the U.S. National Park Service Cultural Landscape Inventory (CLI) was developed in an effort to accumulate digital records of all assets within the national park system. The CLI system can be used to conduct an independent investigation to document the inventory, and then to evaluate the integrity and significance of cultural landscape resources or it can become a companion to the NPS Cultural Landscape Report study, where findings can be used to inform planning and management strategies for resources within the National Park System. The function of Landscape Character Assessment in the UK is to explore the broad patterns that contribute to the character of the landscape throughout England and Scotland. 3.13.6. METHODS OF INVESTIGATION AND PROCEDURAL FOCUS* All systems rely on a combination of research and field inventory with the exception of the Historic Landscape Characterization (HLC) and Historic Land-use Assessment (HLA) methods from the United Kingdom. HLC/HLA are research-based Pg97 methods that rely on a synthesis of existing material in order to recognize broad patterns in the landscape. The procedural focus for all approaches included identifying important attributes that either contribute to the significance of (North America), or characterize the landscape (United Kingdom). The North American examples, particularly those from Alberta and the U.S. National Park Service, are notable in this category because they each emphasize systematic methods of inventory and evaluation for the purposes of assessing the significance of the landscape. 3.13.7. SUMMARY OF APPROACHES North American approaches each provide unique methodologies for inventory and evaluation of cultural resources in an effort to determine their significance. However, the method described by in the U.S. National Park Service Cultural Landscape Inventory and Cultural Landscape Report documents are notable because they are companion documents, meaning that the results of the CLI inform the CLR. Together these documents provide a comprehensive system capable of addressing not only inventory and evaluation of a property, but also future planning and management strategies. Consequently, a synthesis of CLI and CLR documents produced through the U.S. National Park Service provides an extensive, complete and flexible system that offers an appropriate basis for the heritage conservation framework developed in Part III of this chapter. Pg98 PART HI: DEVELOPMENT OF A CONSERVATION FRAMEWORK 3.14 INTRODUCTION A review and comparison of six cultural landscape assessment methods from Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom revealed that methods developed by the United States National Park Service provide the most comprehensive and appropriate approach for developing a heritage conservation framework. 3.15 BACKGROUND: CULTURAL LANDSCAPE ASSESSMENT IN THE US NATIONAL PARK SERVICE According to Page, Gilbert and Dolan (1998), the preservation movement in the United States has been evolving since the National Historic Preservation Act was passed in 1966, primarily through application and interpretation of two seminal documents, the National Register of Historic Places Criteria and the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Treatment of Historic Properties (Page et al. 1998, p8). Page et al. (1998) indicate that cultural landscape assessment began in the 1980s when landscapes became recognized for their significance to "national heritage" (p7) and the U.S. National Park Service (NPS) assumed a leadership role in their stewardship/preservation through their Park Cultural Landscape Program. They say cultural landscapes were first recognized as a "type of cultural resource" (p7) by the NPS in management policies developed in 1988. This policy document was significant as it was designed in part to acknowledge and understand the dynamic nature of, and Pg99 relationships between elements within a landscape so that their "significant historic, design, archeological and ethnographic values" could be protected (Page et al. 1998, p7). In 1994, those management policies were expanded to include Cultural Resource Management Guidelines, which provided "procedural guidance" (p8) for the assessment of cultural landscapes (Pageetai. 1998). These historical efforts have provided a significant foundation for the Park Cultural Landscape Program and a framework for conservation "research, planning and stewardship" (p8) activities and documents committed to preserving the physical characteristics, ecological systems and use of cultural landscape (Page et al. 1998). Two such documents, the Cultural Landscape Inventory Professional Procedures Guide (CLI) and A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Content, Process and Techniques (CLR) are synthesized to develop the heritage conservation framework resulting from investigations documented in this chapter. 3.16 THE HERITAGE CONSERVATION FRAMEWORK The conservation framework (Figure 17) is largely modeled after the structure presented in the National Park Service's, A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques [CLR] (Page et al. 1998). Part I of the CLR demonstrates a sequencing for inventory and evaluation that progresses from "Site History" through "Existing Conditions" and then outlines a process for "Evaluation and Assessment" of significance and integrity of the site based on preceding considerations. Pg 100 r A r \ f \ CULTURAL . 1 ( ") LANDSCAPE 1 INTRODUCTION SITE EXISTING ANALYSIS ; ;REPORT(CLR); > -> HISTORY ••> CONDITIONS n> & EVALUATION y y ( \ PROJECT PROFILE HISTORIC & SCOPE OF WORK CONTEXT I J V J Y r f i | CULTURAL INVENTORY OF ^ ( " ^ INVENTORY OF EXISITING FEATURES 1 LANDSCAPE . ORIGINAL EVAULATE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 • & EXTANT lllll IB [INVENTORY INTEGRITY CHARACTER-DEFINING > CHARACTER-DEFINING \m ; ELEMENTS ELEMENTS v J V J I J A ** t ( \ ;• CULTURAL f } { ^ ! LANDSCAPE PERIOD OF STATEMENT OF 111111111111111111111 • 111111 n MANAGEMENT SIGNIFICANCE SIGNIFICANCE i INVENTORY •> CATEGORIES ! (CLIU) : \r l V J V ) \ / Figure 17: Heritage conservation framework PglOl Content integrated into each section within the guidelines was not only informed by the CLR document, but also by the Cultural Landscape Inventory Professional Procedures Guide [CLI] (Page 2001) and the National Register Bulletin 15 [NRB 15]: How to Apply the National Register Criteria for Evaluation (Andrus 1997). In addition, several other NPS documents were also referenced in the development of the guidelines. These included: - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN 16A [NRB 16a]: HOW to complete the National Register Registration Form (McClelland etal. 1997) - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN 18 [NRB 18}: How to Evaluate and Nominate Designed Historic Landscapes (Keller & Keller) - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN 30 [NRB 30]: Guidelines for Evaluating and Documenting Rural Historic Landscapes (McClelland et al. 1999) - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN 32 [NRB 32]: Guidelines for Evaluating and Documenting Properties Associated with Significant Persons (Boiand n.d.) - NATIONAL REGISTER B ULLETIN 40 [NRB 40]: Guidelines for Identifying, Evaluating and Registering America's Historic Battlefields (Andrus 1997) - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN Al [NRB 41]: Guidelines for Evaluating and Registering Cemeteries and Burial Places (Potter & Boiand 1992) - NATIONAL REGISTER BULLETIN 42 [NRB 42]: Guidelines for Identifying, Evaluating and Registering Historic Mining Properties (Noble & Spude 1997) 3.17 CHAPTER SUMMARY In the next chapter, Stanley Thompson's principles of design, described in CHAPTER | two, are integrated with the framework developed in this chapter, providing a structure for the guidelines that conclude in CHAPTER | four. Pgl02 CHAPTER I four GUIDELINES FOR EVALUATING GOLF COURSES DESIGNED BY STANLEY THOMPSON 4.0 INTRODUCTION The focus of this chapter is to outline the structure and describe the details of guidelines for inventorying and evaluating golf courses designed by Stanley Thompson. The structure of these guidelines has been developed through a process of integration synthesizing Stanley Thompson's principles, distilled by interpretive historical research (CHAPTER| two), with the heritage conservation framework derived through a comparative analysis and synthesis of evaluation approaches (Chapter| three). Application of the guidelines through a demonstration example is provided in CHAPTER | five. 4.1 GUIDELINE STRUCTURE The conservation framework organizes the guidelines structure (Figure 18) to provide a systematic approach for the assessment. Stanley Thompson's design principles are then integrated to ensure that the proposed guidelines will be focused on and sensitive to characteristics and features of the landscape that reflect his design philosophies and vision. Thompson's design principles have particular influence in two specific areas of the framework: developing a historic context suitable for evaluating his collection and identifying the original characteristics and features of his works. Pgl03 CLIENT & GOLF COURSE ANALYSIS BACKGROUND > & EVALUATION .aaaaiaiaaaaaak. iiiiiiiiiiimiiiiiimmiimi STANLEY THOMPSON'S DESIGN INVENTORY OF :CHARACTER-DEFINING| PRINCIPLES ELEMENTS COMPARE PRINCIPLES OPERATIONALIZED INFORMED BY i kiiiiiiin lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll! DESIGN ! * ' j ORIGINAL & ^naBCHHDBHBHB«f ^nnnniiHaiiaiMB^ EXTANT OFTHECOURSE CHARACTER-DEFINING BASED ON ELEMENTS t "MAJOR EVENTS* IDENTIFY DEVELOP PERIOD OF STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE SIGNIFICANCE > Figure 18 Guideline structure As noted in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.2, historic context is the "organizing structure that groups historic properties which share a common theme" (Page 2001, p58). In the case of golf courses designed by Stanley Thompson, each to some degree is a reflection of his design philosophies. Therefore, Thompson's principles provide the basis for significance and for providing what Page (2001) describes as a "comparative analysis" (Page 2001, p58), in this case comparing one golf course with another within his body of work. As a consequence, it is essential for guidelines to be capable of effectively identifying all original features of a golf course landscape that provide evidence of Thompson's philosophies translated to the natural environment and that as a result contribute to the significance of the course. A method for identifying landscape characteristics and character-defining elements essential to conveying the significance of the course will be described in Section 4.5.2 (GOLF COURSE INVENTORY). Pgl05 4.2 GUIDELINES FOR EVALUATING GOLF COURSES DESIGNED BY STANLEY THOMPSON The guidelines have been developed as a systematic, expert-based approach to inventory and evaluate of the works of Stanley Thompson. These guidelines are grounded in conservation theory and are intended for application to courses designed by Stanley Thompson on a case-by-case basis. They have been designed to identify all original character-defining elements that reflect Thompson's design philosophies as translated to the natural landscape and to determine whether and to what degree those elements continue to persist on the property today. 4.2.1 GUIDELINE ASSUMPTIONS AND OUTLINE These guidelines were developed based on the following fundamental assumptions: 1. Each course evaluated will first be confirmed as Thompson's work and will have adequate background material available to fully and properly apply the guidelines. This implies that Thompson's contributions to the course have been previously confirmed through evidence-based research; and, 2. These guidelines are intended to conform to best practices in heritage resource assessment. Additional inventory and analysis may be required to meet local or agency requirements. PglOS The guidelines are presented in the following sections: 4.3 Preface 4.4 Client & Golf Course Background 4.5 Site History 4.6 Existing Conditions 4.7 Analysis and Evaluation 4.8 Golf Course Planning and Management 4.3 PREFACE These guidelines have been developed to provide an expert-based approach to inventory and evaluation of the features that express Thompson's design philosophies and principles and therefore the potential significance of the golf course. Application of the guidelines is intended to result in comprehensive baseline information that can be used to inform future planning and management decisions with regard to course design. 4.3.1 PURPOSE & USE Guidelines presented herein have been developed in response to this lack of research on Thompson's work and are intended to provide a mechanism for identifying and evaluating all original features of a Thompson course that are integral to expressing its significance. Application of these guidelines will produce a baseline of information that can be used to guide long-term planning and management strategies for the course design, to ensure that it will continue to express its historic value for generations to come. Pgl07 4.3.2 QUALIFICATIONS FOR EVALUATORS As this is intended to be an expert-based approach, evaluators or a team of evaluators will require a unique set of skills in order to effectively apply these guidelines. Evaluators/teams should have a thorough understanding of the history, evolution and fundamental principles of golf course architecture, not only as exhibited in North America, but also since the formalization of golf courses began in the 18th century. Evaluators should be conversant in Thompson's philosophies of design and with golf course design trends that were evident during the time period of his career. Evaluators should have at least a cursory knowledge of the economic conditions and of art and architectural trends of the era in which the course being investigated was built. In addition, they should understand the technological advancements that would have influenced Thompson's designs throughout his career. Finally, evaluators should have an appreciation for principles of heritage conservation in order to understand how this inventory and evaluation will contribute to the conservation of a Stanley Thompson course as a baseline of information that can be used to guide future planning and stewardship and possibly heritage designation. Pgl08 4.4 CLIENT & GOLF COURSE BACKGROUND The purpose of this section is to gather information on the client and golf course to develop a project profile. The profile developed will be used to ensure that the product of this investigation responds with sufficient detail to the requirements of the club. 4.4.1 INVENTORY UNIT The subject of the inventory is considered to be the inventory unit (Page 2001) therefore, in the case of Thompson's courses the full name should be recorded in this section. If the course has been renamed over the years, previous names can also be included, using the term "formerly". 4.4.2 GOLF COURSE MANAGEMENT SUMMARY The Golf Course Management summary develops a client profile that will describe the impetus for the assessment as well as the needs, priorities and policies of the club management as they relate to the design of the course and its protection. This information should be gathered through a review of pertinent club documents and an initial interview with the golf course owner(s) and/or greens committee and superintendent and other interested stakeholders. Pgl09 4.4.3 HISTORICAL SUMMARY The historical summary develops a profile of the golf course starting with identifying the period(s) of significance and then providing a cursory overview of major alterations to the physical design. This section will also detail any changes to the operational/organizational structure of the golf club throughout its history. The period(s) of significance for a Thompson course refers to the duration of his direct involvement in the planning, design, construction and/or grow-in phases of the original course and subsequent renovations and/or additions. Each period should be documented, noting start and end dates, as well as identifying the type of work and the extent of work completed. Type of work refers to Thompson's contributions to layout/design and/or construction of the site; meanwhile, extent describes the work as new design, renovation and/or addition and identifies the number of holes addressed in his scope of work. As a reference, the term period(s) of significance was defined previously in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.4 (PERIOD OF SIGNIFICANCE). The dates and scope of any major alterations subsequent to Thompson's involvement should also be listed in this section so that the details and impacts can be examined further in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.3 (CHRONOLOGY AND PHYSICAL HISTORY). PgllO Finally, changes in the organizational structure of a club (e.g. from private to public; one owner to membership-owned) should also be recorded and if possible, correlated with major alterations that have taken place throughout the club's history. 4.4.4 SCOPE OF WORK Each golf course investigated using the guidelines will require a comprehensive and detailed analysis in order to generate meaningful results capable of informing planning processes. The scope of the work for each site will vary according to its scale and complexity. 4.4.4.1 SITE SCALE AND BOUNDARIES An 18-hole Thompson design was typically laid out on no less that 130 acres of land (Thompson c.1930). However, several of his courses were only 9 holes and in some cases he was responsible for the renovation and/or addition of various holes. Therefore, the first step in establishing a scope of work for the project entails identifying the scale of the site in acres and then defining a study boundary. Once this has been determined then the complexities of the site are more easily defined. Page et al. (1998) suggest that the study boundary identifies "the physical limits of the investigation" (p39) and can consider both site and regional contexts (Page etal. 1998). On golf courses where Thompson was responsible for the nine or eighteen-hole design, the site boundary can often be defined using a historic legal description for the Pgin property. Areas and/or features within the property limits that have no association to Thompson whatsoever (e.g. a recently-constructed parking lot) should be identified as non-contributing (Page 2001) from the outset and therefore not considered within the assessment. In the case where a parcel of the original golf course property has been severed and then sold or expropriated or conversely where a new parcel has been purchased in order to add holes, a composite site boundary should be defined to reflect both current and historical legal descriptions of the site. On courses where Thompson was responsible for adding or renovating specific holes, the boundaries of those holes and/or significant characteristics must be identified in order to isolate his contributions so that they may be analyzed independently from the remainder of the course. In these instances boundaries may be delineated using features within the landscape (Figure 19) as described in the U. S. National Park System Cultural Landscape Inventory document (Page 2001). The overall scale of the site and the configuration of its boundary should be recorded in a narrative. Site boundaries should also be shown graphically on site maps and/or an aerial photograph of the course, especially when using features to mark the boundary (Page et al. 1998). Pgll2 The regional context situates a Figure 19: NPS guidelines for selecting boundaries golf course within relevant systems - "Features for marking boundaries" - "Legally recorded boundary lines" (physical, hydrological, visual, etc.) so - "Historic legal boundaries of a single property ...when the historic property that their relationships can be possesses continuity of historic landscape characteristics throughout..." - "Current legal boundaries, when they understood (Page et al. 1998). Since, coincide with the area retaining historic landscape characteristics today. Acreage qualities of a golf course such as views may be the same or smaller than that within the historic boundary" and vistas to the exterior context can be - "Manmade features, such as stone walls; hedgerows; drainage ditches; the curb considered significant on a Thompson lines of highways, streets and roads; areas of new construction" - "Boundaries that are relatively course, a regional boundary should be permanent, such as stone fences, irrigation or drainage ditches and mature identified in addition to the site hedge rows, when such barriers are based on historic land use or ownership boundary. Identifying the extent of the and encompass the concentration of related historic landscape regional boundary can be difficult, but characteristics." - "Long-standing vegetation that is visible at all seasons, such as a row of can be determined based on prevailing hardwoods, when it marks the edge of the area containing historic landscape characteristics of the landscape. For characteristics." - "Rights of way, such as roads, established example, at Banff Springs Golf Club paths and highways, when they separate areas of land that are historically Thompson used the surrounding significant from those that are unrelated, insignificant, or not historic" - "Natural topographic features, such as mountain ranges as spectacular ridges, valleys, rivers and forests." - "Natural features, such as rivers, terminating views and framed vistas of lakeshores, ridges, plateaus and contour elevations when such features limited specific elements, such as the Banff the historic development of the land and continue to contain historic landscape Springs Hotel on several holes, providing characteristics" Extracted from Page 2001, p42 tremendous visual interest throughout the course. In that case, the regional PgH3 context would extend to include the horizon lines of the surrounding mountain ranges. Identifying the extent of regional boundaries is most effectively conveyed using annotated aerial photographs and/or site maps (Page et al. 1998). 4.4.4.2 SITE COMPLEXITY The physical characteristics and ecological systems of each golf course site can be quite varied, some requiring a more detailed study than others. Golf courses also exhibit an added layer of complexity driven by their cultural history, which becomes visible in the nature and frequency of alterations. The scope of work for the project (scale and complexity) must be clearly defined in advance of the study in order to provide timelines and cost estimates for the work, as this study may form an initial step in the master planning process (Page et al. 1998). Pgll4 4.5: SITE HISTORY AND INVENTORY Site history and inventory describes the historical context and provides guidance for producing a thorough inventory of original landscape characteristics and golf course features and documenting their chronological evolution throughout each historical period to present. 4.5.1 HISTORIC CONTEXT As presented the in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.2.1 (HISTORIC CONTEXT RELEVANT TO STANLEY THOMPSON'S WORK), Thompson's design principles provide the common thread linking courses within his body of work and a basis for evaluating their significance. Thompson's principles became discernible on the landscape through identifiable elements that defined the character of the original golf course design. Thompson's translation of his own philosophies was unique on each site given its specific natural context. Therefore, the significance of each course evaluated using these guidelines will ultimately be established by determining whether and to what degree the original character-defining elements of the course continue to persist. This will be accomplished through an evaluation of their condition and integrity. Pgll5 4.5.2 GOLF COURSE INVENTORY Thompson's golf courses can be distinguished from one another by the way in which his design philosophies are translated to a natural landscape given its inherent character. The following section has been modeled after the U.S. National Park Service's Cultural Landscape Inventory Professional Procedures Guide to outline a sequential approach intended to identify all original character-defining elements of a golf course that reflect the implementation of Thompson's principles. This will provide a baseline for evaluating the significance of the specific Thompson course, in other words, the more original features remaining intact, the greater its significance. 4.5.2.1 PROPERTY LEVELS Thompson's courses derive complexity not only from their natural context, but also through the translation of his design philosophies, which leave an imprint on the landscape at various scales. It is therefore necessary to subdivide a course into a hierarchy of property levels so that they can be identified and adequately described through the inventory process. Because Thompson's design principles have a direct correlation with landscape characteristics and character-defining elements at Landscape, Component Landscape, and Component Landscape Feature levels, each (as defined previously in CHAPTER) three, Section 3.4.1) should be considered as part of the investigation. PgU6 At landscape level (as defined in CHAPTER | three, SECTION 3.4.1) it is important to understand the composition of the golf course holistically before examining its individual components and features. This requires recognizing relationships between the golf course routing and all of its ancillary features (e.g. practice facilities, natural features, clubhouse, maintenance facilities and buffer areas). A routing can reflect an architect's ability to capitalize on opportunities inherent in the natural environment to create a journey that captivates the golfer by its rhythm, flow, aesthetic and strategic qualities, evoking a range of emotions throughout their experience of the place. However, golf course routings are organized to take advantage of elements of the natural environmental, such as streams, topography, vegetation and viewsheds. A stream system provides a natural thread that can tie the routing together not only physically, but also aesthetically. These features can contribute to and define the unique complexities of a specific site by dictating the arrangement of holes and at the same time by providing a central strategic element on various holes of a routing. Component Landscapes (as defined in CHAPTER| three, SECTION 3.4.1) on a Thompson course may include individual holes of a routing, practice facilities, clubhouse and parking, maintenance facilities and so on. Although these components are integral to the composition of the overall site, they can also be recognized for their own importance within the landscape. Page (2001) indicates each component "warrants individual documentation to adequately record the physical character of the Pgll7 overall"(pii). For instance, each golf hole should be documented for its length, strategic intent, aesthetic qualities, as well as positioning and orientation within the routing. This is particularly important on a Stanley Thompson course because he believed that each hole should be distinct from the others in order to "avoid monotony" (Thompson, c. 1930) on the course. Component Landscape Features (as defined in CHAPTER| three, SECTION 3.4.1) can include tees, greens, fairways, bunkers and various other attributes of each golf hole or similar scale features of any other component landscape. Attributes of a golf hole can affect playability, aesthetics, maintenance and experience of place and therefore, the position, shape, scale, orientation and form of each should be considered. 4.5.2.2 IDENTIFYING LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS AND CHARACTER-DEFINING ELEMENTS OF A STANLEY THOMPSON GOLF COURSE The terms landscape characteristics and character-defining elements were defined in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.4.2 (LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS AND CHARACTER- DEFINING ELEMENTS) as follows: Page (2001) defined landscape characteristics as "the tangible and intangible aspects of a landscape from the historical period, which define and characterize the landscape and which, individually and collectively, give a landscape character and aid in understanding its cultural values" (p26). Pgll8 Meanwhile, Parks Canada and the province of Alberta describe character- defining elements as "the materials, form, location and spatial configurations that contribute to the significance of a resource and which must be retained in order to preserve its heritage value" (MHPP n.d., pll) or a variation thereof (Parks Canada 2003). Each of these definitions provides a slightly different level of resolution as it relates to inventorying a cultural landscape. Landscape characteristics appear to address the features that characterize the property in a broader sense, whereas character-defining elements focus on qualities of the landscape that reveal the reasons it is valued. Consequently, the guidelines adopt these terms to provide a multi-level approach to inventorying the original features of a Stanley Thompson golf course. The purpose of the inventory is to identify all character-defining elements of the golf course that reflect Thompson's design vision for the site. This will be accomplished by considering every landscape characteristic relevant at each property level to identify all character-defining elements that were part of the original design. Inventory Tables corresponding to each landscape characteristic (e.g. natural systems and features, spatial organization, land use, circulation, topography, vegetation, etc.) have been developed herein in Figures 20-30, to guide identification of character-defining elements. However, not all landscape characteristics will apply to every golf course, nor do they apply at each property level (Landscape, Component Landscape or Component Landscape Feature level). Pgll9 Inventory Tables include: LANDSCAPE LEVEL Figure 20: INVENTORY TABLE A | Circulation Figure 21: INVENTORY TABLE B | Natural Systems & Features Figure 22: INVENTORY TABLE C| Spatial Organization Figure 23: INVENTORY TABLE D| Vegetation Figure 24: INVENTORY TABLE E| Views & Vistas COMPONENT LANDSCAPE LEVEL Figure 25: INVENTORY TABLE F| Archeological Sites Figure 26: INVENTORY TABLE G | Constructed Water Features Figure 27: INVENTORY TABLE H| Natural Systems and Features Figure 28: INVENTORY TABLE 11 Spatial Organization COMPONENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE LEVEL FIGURE 29: INVENTORY TABLE J | Buildings and Structures FIGURE 30: INVENTORY TABLE K| Topography The format for the tables is adapted from the classification system outlined in the National Park Service's Cultural Landscape Inventory Professional Procedures Guide (Page 2001). Each table is divided into three columns, the first of which defines and outlines the scope of the landscape characteristic; the second column identifies the applicable property level and related Thompson principle(s); and the final column describes considerations for identifying inventory items. Pgl20 The inventory process should begin by examining the golf course holistically considering landscape characteristics that affect the "landscape" property level as identified in the centre column of each table. These landscape characteristic categories include: natural systems and features, spatial organization, circulation, topography and vegetation. Then landscape characteristics that address component landscape and component landscape feature levels should be evaluated. For each landscape characteristic category, the evaluator should reflect on the definition and scope of the landscape characteristic itself, as well as the associated Thompson design principle(s). Then evaluators should refer to the "considerations" column and respond to each using a narrative and supporting historical and graphic evidence wherever possible. Pgl21 INVENTORY TABLE A INVENTORY TABLE A considers the original circulation on the site at landscape level. On a golf course this includes not only the roads, paths and trails designed to access or move through the golf course on foot or by car, but also the routing of the golf course which organizes a player's journey through the landscape in the way in which the design wishes them to experience it. Figure 20: INVENTORY TABLE A LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS: CIRCULATION DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES CIRCULATION LANDSCAPE LEVEL The spaces, features, and CIRCULATION Characterize the original circulation applied materials finishes - Paths from green to tee should system within the golf course that constitute systems of meander and lack formality movement in the - The site should be readily accessible Describe the location, alignments and landscape' (Page 2001, p28) dimensions of all original paths and ROUTING roads - Courses should measure between 6,000-6,600 yards Identify construction profile and - The variety in length and difficulty of materials for each holes should be evenly distributed throughout the round. The hardest Identify the original routing type hole should be integrated into the (loop/returning nine) and length back nine and the second hardest hole should appear no earlier than Describe the distribution of par and midway through the front nine. handicap on each hole throughout - Three or four par 3s should be the original routing interspersed throughout the round however not near the beginning or EVOLUTION OF CIRCULATION SYSTEM end of a round Document changes in alignment and - The finish should be long and difficult construction of original circulation and finishing holes should not face systems into the setting sun (west) Pgl22 INVENTORY TABLE B INVENTORY TABLE B considers the natural systems and features of the site at landscape level. These are qualities of the natural environment that at landscape level can affect the orientation and configuration of golf holes within the routing. Figure 21: INVENTORY TABLE B LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: NATURAL SYSTEMS & FEATURES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES NATURAL SYSTEMS AND LANDSCAPE LEVEL LANDSCAPE LEVEL FEATURES SITE SELECTION Identify any predominant landforms. The aspects that have • The chemical and physical character features, hydrological systems and influenced the of the soil is of the utmost ecological communities (rock development and physical importance outcroppings, ridgelines, rivers, form of the landscape'. • Sites that exhibit a variety of streams, ponds, wetlands and (Page2001, p28) topography (generally suitable to predominant plant species) that golf), natural systems (shores, valleys, characterized the original landscape Geomorphology: large- farm & woodlands) and water scale patterns of land features (streams, rivers, ponds), are Describe dominant physical and forms preferred aesthetic qualities of the natural • The selected site should be at least systems and features. Identify how Geology: the superficial 130 acres in order to work in natural they were considered in the original characteristics of the features design earth OVERRIDING PRINCIPLES Identify any limitations to Hydrology: the system of • 'Nature must always be the design/construction that would have surface water and sub architect's model' been presented by the natural systems surface water and features of the site, based on technologies available to Thompson in Ecology: the the period of significance interrelationship between living organisms, each Describe how natural features of the other and their site affected the sequence of holes environment (orientation, length & playing characteristics) Climate: weather conditions of EVOLUTION OF NATURAL SYSTEMS temperature, wind Describe changes to any natural velocity, and precipitation system or features that contributed to and/or that have subsequently Native Vegetation: impacted the original routing of golf Indigenous plant holes. For example, the location. communities, and extent or aesthetic of a creek or river indigenous aggregate and that affects the routing, may have individual plant features changed over the years due to natural forces or human interventions. The (Previous definitions extracted change as well as its impact on the from Page 2001, p28) course should be noted Pgl23 INVENTORY TABLE C INVENTORY TABLE C considers the spatial organization of the site at landscape level. In the context of a Thompson course this deals primarily with the configuration of and relationships between holes, as well as visual associations between holes. Figure 22: INVENTORY TABLE C LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: SPATIAL ORGANIZATION DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES SPATIAL ORGANIZATION LANDSCAPE LEVEL LANDSCAPE LEVEL The three-dimensional ROUTING ROUTING organization of physical - Courses should measure between Identify the original routing type forms and visual 6,000-6,600 yards (loop/returning nine) and length associations in the - The variety in length and difficulty of landscape, including the holes should be evenly distributed Describe the distribution of par and articulation of ground. throughout the round. The hardest handicap on each hole throughout the vertical, and overhead hole should be Integrated into the original routing planes that define and back nine and the second hardest create space' (Page 2001, hole should appear no earlier than Document the character of the first P28) midway through the front nine hole and finishing sequence and - Three or four par 3s should be describe their relationship to the interspersed throughout the round. clubhouse but not near the beginning or end of a round Describe the relationships between all - Each shot in the game should be levels of circulation existing on the planned and every hole should be property (roads, trails & paths) different from the one that preceded it Describe natural features (ridges. - The finish should be long and difficult water features, etc) that contribute to and finishing holes should not face organization of the golf holes into the setting sun (west) Describe any features that provide improved visibility to the features of a hole or adjacent holes. For example, elevated tees EVOLUTION OF SPATIAL ORGANIZATION Document major changes to the design and/or aesthetic of the original routing or holes therein and/or to views and vistas and/or to circulation on site since the most recent period of significance Pgl24 INVENTORY TABLED INVENTORY TABLE D refers to the vegetation of the site at landscape level. This can include buffering, specimen or cosmetic plantings on the course or surrounding the clubhouse, practice facilities, and/or first and final tees. This category also contemplates Thompson's general treatment of existing site vegetation. Figure 23: INVENTORY TABLE D LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS: VEGETATION DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES VEGETATION LANDSCAPE LEVEL Document any formal planting 'Individual and aggregate LANDSCAPE schemes that were designed and plant features of • Landscaping should be used to implemented by Thompson for deciduous and evergreen enhance the aesthetic quality of key clubhouse, first and final tees and trees, shrubs, vines. course elements, such as the practice facilities. (Species, location. ground covers and clubhouse, first tee, final green and condition, and aesthetic) herbaceous plants and practice tee and green plant communities, Identify significant and predominant whether indigenous or VEGETATION species, location, condition, and introduced' (Page 2001, • Trees bordering fairways should be strategic intent of any specimen trees p28) planted in clumps and not rows to within the fairway of a hole define the fairway and hide undesirable views Identify original grass species on • Underbrush and windfalls should be fairways, greens, tees and rough cleared for 30' back from the fairway, if not, brush should be left in its EVOLUTION OF SITE VEGETATION natural state Describe any planting and/or pruning • Branches of existing vegetation programs implemented throughout should be left feathered down to the the history of the course. Document ground the impact of these programs on aesthetics and playability of the course since the most recent period of significance Pgl25 INVENTORY TABLE E INVENTORY TABLE E identifies significant views and vistas on the golf course at landscape level. This includes views that may contribute to the experience of place or vistas that have been captured intentionally to highlight a focal point either on the golf course site itself or in the surrounding context. Figure 24: INVENTORY TABLE E LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: VIEWS & VISTAS DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES VIEWS AND VISTAS LANDSCAPE LEVEL Describe each significant vista and The prospect created by a VEGETATION view captured within the original range of vision in the - Clearing should be strategic in order design. Identify the focal points of cultural landscape, to capture and frame views vistas and features used to frame or conferred by the highlight vistas composition of other SITE SELECTION landscape characteristics. • Sites and surrounding vistas should EVOLUTION OF VISTAS AND VIEWS Views and vistas can be be aesthetically pleasing/picturesque Document changes made to vistas distinguished as follows': and views through succession or human intervention since the most VIEWS: The expansive recent period of significance and/or panoramic prospect of a broad range Document changes in the course or of vision, which may be surrounding context that affect vistas naturally-occurring or captured within the original design deliberately contrived' 'VISTAS: The controlled prospect of a discrete, linear range of vision, which is deliberately contrived' (Page 2001, P29) Pgl26 INVENTORY TABLE F Archeological sites would be uncommon to find on a Thompson golf course; however, in the event that a site were discovered INVENTORY TABLE F would address this situation. Figure 25: INVENTORY TABLE F LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES COMPONENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE LEVEL Determine whether the archeological The location of ruins, site was a recognized feature of the traces, or deposited property prior to the golf course artifacts in the landscape. design. evidenced by the presence of either surface or Identify whether the archeological subsurface features (e.g. site was consciously and/or road traces, reforested sensitively integrated as an element fields and the ruins of of the original design. buildings and structures' (Page 2001, p29) EVOLUTION OF ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES Describe preservation measures undertaken to maintain the archeological site since the most recent period of significance. Pgl27 INVENTORY TABLE G Constructed water features were not common on Thompson courses, but INVENTORY TABLE G documents the nature of any constructed water features, either as elements of or as impacting elements, of the original design. Figure 26: INVENTORY TABLE G LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: CONSTRUCTED WATER FEATURES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES CONSTRUCTED WATER COMPONENT LANDSCAPE LEVEL Document the location, size, shape FEATURES (dimension), aesthetic and/or The built features and strategic quality of all ponds, elements that utilize drainage ditches, and/or wetlands water for aesthetic etc constructed as part of concerns in the landscape' Thompson's original design intent (Page 2001, p29) EVOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTED WATER FEATURES Describe changes to previous any features outlined based on the previous consideration since the most recent period of significance Document the impacts to the aesthetics and strategy of the course/golf holes Identify and describe the location, size, shape (dimension), aesthetic and/or strategic quality of all ponds, drainage ditches, and/or wetlands etc constructed since the most recent period of significance and describe their impacts on the aesthetics and strategy of the course/golf holes Pgl28 INVENTORY TABLE H INVENTORY TABLE H considers the natural systems and features of the site at component landscape level. These qualities can affect the aesthetics and playability of the golf holes as individual units. Figure 27: INVENTORY TABLE H LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: NATURALSYSTEMS & FEATURES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES NATURAL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENT LANDSCAPE LEVEL LANDSCAPE LEVEL FEATURES FAIRWAYS Identify any predominant landforms. The aspects that have • Remove natural elements that features, hydrological systems and influenced the impede strategy or present a hazard ecological communities (rock development and physical to golfers outcroppings, ridgelines, rivers, form of the landscape' streams, ponds, wetlands and (Page 2001, p28) WATER FEATURES predominant plant species) that - Water features should be left in their characterized the original landscape Hydrology: the system of natural state, unless slope surface water and sub stabilization is necessary Identify prevailing climatic conditions surface water - Water features should be visible and describe how these conditions impacted the playability of each hole Ecology: the SEQUENCE OF HOLES (if applicable) interrelationship between - The most challenging holes on the living organisms, each course should not be challenging Describe the physical and aesthetic other and their solely based on length; rather they qualities of natural features identified. environment require careful consideration of Explain whether and how each was prevailing wind, grades and other considered within the original design Climate: weather local conditions as well conditions of Describe how natural features of the temperature, wind VEGETATION site affected the orientation, length & velocity, and precipitation • Underbrush and windfalls should be playing characteristics of each hole cleared for 30' back from the fairway. Native Vegetation: if not, brush should be left in its EVOLUTION NATURAL SYSTEMS AND FEATURES indigenous plant natural state Describe changes to any natural communities, and • Branches of existing vegetation system or features that contributed to indigenous aggregate and should be left feathered down to the and/or that have subsequently individual plant features ground impacted each of the golf holes (Previous definitions extracted from Page 2001, p28) Pgl29 INVENTORY TABLE I INVENTORY TABLE I considers the spatial organization of each golf hole considering the configuration of features that is unique to each. Figure 28: INVENTORY TABLE 1 LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: SPATIAL ORGANIZATION DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES SPATIAL ORGANIZATION COMPONENT LANDSCAPE LEVEL COMPONENT LANDSCAPE LEVEL The three-dimensional SEQUENCE OF HOLES Describe the school(s) (strategic, penal. organization of physical - Courses should start off on an easy heroic) of design employed on each forms and visual par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion hole throughout the original course associations in the - First and tenth holes should be design landscape, including the located in close proximity to the articulation of ground. clubhouse Describe the shot values of each hole vertical, and overhead and identify the features that planes that define and OVERRIDING PRINCIPLES contribute to the shot values create space' (Page 2001, • The most successful course is one P28) that will test the skill of the most Document original clubhouse location. advanced player, without as well as proximity and views to the discouraging the "duffer", while 1st and 10th tees and 9th and 18th adding to the enjoyment of both greens EVOLUTION OF SPATIAL CONFIGUATION Document major changes to key elements that contribute to the strategy of the golf hole since the most recent period of significance Pgl30 INVENTORY TABLE J Inventory Table J applies to all buildings and structures that were part of the original design that Thompson had a part in. Figure 29: INVENTORY TABLE J LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS: BUILDINGS & STRUCTURES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES COMPONENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE LEVEL Describe the location, materials and 'Elements constructed FURNISHINGS: construction of all original primarily for sheltering • Site furnishings to exhibit a natural constructed features (bridges, stairs, any form of human aesthetic rain shelters) activity are buildings. Elements constructed for EVOLUTION OF BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES functional purposes other Document the dates, materials and than sheltering human construction specifications of any activity are structures' replacement structures (Page 2001, p28) Pgl31 INVENTORY TABLE K INVENTORY TABLE K relates to the scale, position, orientation and style of all fundamental elements of each golf hole, including bunkers, tees, greens and fairways. Figure 30A: INVENTORY TABLE K LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: TOPOGRAPHY- SITE SELECTION, BUNKERS & TEES DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES TOPOGRAPHY COMPONENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE LEVEL LANDSCAPE COMPONENT FEATURE LEVEL The three-dimensional SITE SELECTION GREENSIDE, FAIRWAY AND'CARRY* BUNKERS configuration of the • The natural beauty of a site is Describe the aesthetic qualities that landscape surface important, yet artificial features can characterized the original bunker characterized by features be made to appear natural style on the course (e.g. slope and articulation) and BUNKERS Document the original location. orientation (e.g. elevation • Horizon lines should be long, rolling position, orientation, shape (3D) and and and varied and should tie 'gracefully1 size of ail significant bunkers on each solar aspect)' into surrounding terrain hole that affect the strategy or (Page 2001, p28) • Bunker edges should be made to look aesthetics of the holes as natural as possible • Bunkers should be visible EVOLUTION OF BUNKERING • Bunkering should be placed to create Document the any additions or strategy and character of a hole, but a deletions of bunkers on the course route should be left accessible for the since the most recent period of lesser player significance • Bunkers farthest from the green should allow the easiest recovery; Describe changes in location. bunkers should become progressively position, orientation, shape (3D) and more challenging the closer they are size to any contributing bunker since positioned to the green the most recent period of significance • 'Carry bunkers' placed strategically through the fairway to turn a hole are Document changes to adjacent the exception and should be steep features that affect the appearance faced requiring explosive recovery or function of contributing bunkers shots • Greenside bunkers can vary in depth TEES and character, but one should never Identify the original tee locations. be able to putt from them sizes and orientations for each hole. Describe their shape and elevation in TEES relation to the fairway • Teeing area should be 1800-3000 sq ft on average and will depend on the EVOLUTION OF TEES length of the hole Identify the location, orientation and • Teeing area should be split into two size of new tees since the most or three areas recent period of significance • Where necessary, tees should be raised to improve visibility Document original tees that have • Ensure maintainable slopes been decommissioned and describe their relationship in terms of the strategy of the hole Pgl32 Figure 30B: INVENTORY TABLE K LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTIC: TOPOGRAPHY- GREEN SURFACES/COMPLEXES & FAIRWAYS DEFINITION & SCOPE PROPERTY LEVEL & ASSOCIATED CONSIDERATIONS THOMPSON PRINCIPLES TOPOGRAPHY CON'T COMPONENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE LEVEL GREEN SURFACES & COMPLEXES GREEN SURFACES & COMPLEXES Describe the original method of • Contours of the green surface and construction (push up) and whether surrounds should be long and must sub-surface drainage was used tie gracefully with surrounding contours and setting Document the original contours, • Mounding in the green complex character and species of grass for can sometimes reflect the form and each green surface character of the surrounding landscape Document the size and shape of each • In general, green surfaces should original green and the orientation of be visible (sloped back-to-front), each in relation to the approach shot but some blind green-sites add to the charm of a hole. Efforts should Describe the nature of the original be made to ensure that blind shots contours directly adjacent to each are safe for the players green surface (mounding, • Greens should exhibit variety and depressions, etc.) character in the surface contours and should be at least 70% Describe the height and massing pinnable characteristics of the vegetation • Courses should average 6,000 sq ft surrounding the green complex per green, individual green sizes will vary according to the length of EVOLUTION OF GREENS the approach shot Document whether greens have been • Greens should be orientated to renovated and the method of face the shot construction employed and identify • Ensure adequate afternoon sun on which ones greens Document additions/deletions or FAIRWAYS changes to green surfaces or • Fairway should average 60-65 yards complexes or associated vegetation width since the most recent period of • Level/smooth surface contours in significance areas of the fairway that make it more fair for the average player or FAIRWAYS that reward an optimal shot Describe the original width, shape and physical (3D) characteristics of each fairway EVOLUTION OF FAIRWAYS Document changes to the width, shape or physical characteristics of each fairway since the most recent period of significance Pgl33 4.5.3 CHRONOLOGY AND PHYSICAL HISTORY In order to understand the current state of a Thompson course it is important to recognize how and why the course has changed over time. This is accomplished by tracing the chronological evolution of the original character-defining elements of the design (identified using Inventory Tables A-K in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.5.2.2). All major events throughout the history of the course should be catalogued by date and type and then a narrative should describe details of the event. On a Thompson course major events could include: Addition of a single hole or multiple holes or features Alterations to the entire course or part of the course and/or an entire hole or part of a hole and/or feature Conservation or preservation of one or several features on the course through a mandated management plan Damage to the entire or part of the course and/or an entire or part of a hole or a feature as a result of natural forces, maintenance practices or neglect Demolition of the entire course or part of the course and/or an entire hole or part of a hole or a feature Decommissioning of one or several holes as a result of land transfer or sale Design and construction of a new feature, hole or nine Erosion of an entire hole/feature or part of a hole or a feature as a result of natural forces, maintenance practices or neglect Expansion of a course as a result of property purchase Expansion of one feature or several features, unconsciously as a result of mechanized maintenance equipment or consciously to meet the requirements of club stakeholders Pgl34 • Movement or removal of a feature or hole for various reasons, including playability and mitigating safety issues • Implementation of a naturalization program • Reconstruction or rehabilitation of features • Stabilization of features or holes (List adapted from Page 2001, p63) Dates should be given for the start and end of each major event. Major events can include periods of significance (when Thompson was involved) subsequent to the original design/construction or non-related major events thereafter. If several smaller operations took place as part of the same major event they can all be organized and documented within the associated era. Narratives should be brief and in addition to the details of the work, should include name(s) and associations of relevant parties (Page 2001). 4.5.4 RESEARCH 4.5.4.1 MATERIALS Historical research will be required to support the inventory of original character-defining elements and to track their chronological evolution. Primary and secondary sources of evidence can be invaluable for understanding the nature of the site, Thompson's original design intent and the evolution of the physical elements of the site over time. Pgl35 For example, historical surveys, maps and plans that accompany the deed of title will describe the legal boundaries and illustrate original topographical features of the site (Page 2001). Meanwhile, original layout and routing plans or blueprints of the originals, accompanying contract specifications, progress reports, sketches, field notes and letters to clients written or drafted by Stanley Thompson can demonstrate his original design intent for a course. Historical aerial and site photographs can also be integral in providing essential information about character-defining elements of the original design. Similar types of primary evidence can be used to document all subsequent historical periods (Page 2001). Secondary sources may include historic or recent, published or unpublished documents written by others that describe the golf course in question. Other potential sources include books describing the works of Stanley Thompson, newspaper/digital articles, golf course histories, "pocket pros", course maps, academic theses and cultural/environmental reports and resource inventories. These sources are useful for developing physical and historical contexts for the property (Page 2001). 4.5.4.2 INTERNAL SOURCES - THE GOLF CLUB The quantity and quality of the records held by a Thompson club can vary dramatically. In some cases, historical documentation has been lost or even destroyed over the course of the club's history, leaving virtually no records. In contrast, other Pgl36 Thompson clubs have a richly documented history that includes a range of written, graphic, photographic and even video documentation. Recent alterations (over the past few decades) are likely to have been documented in greater detail by the club, golf course architect and/or construction company contracted to complete the work. These records are often available for review or the golf course architect may still be alive to provide details of the work. 4.5.4.3 EXTERNAL SOURCES - OUTSIDE OF THE GOLF COURSE The Stanley Thompson Society Collection at the University of Guelph Archives contains the largest public compilation of documents related to Stanley Thompson's body of work. Although extensive, the collection is (at present) incomplete. Stanley Thompson Provenance research conducted at the University of Guelph (Paine & Brown 2010) provides a definitive list of all known Thompson works as well as a catalogue of primary and secondary evidence to support the findings for each golf course. This resource can be effective in advancing the search for relevant material. The University of Guelph archival collection and the Provenance research catalogue are merely starting points for data collection. Additional enquiries should be made with Golf Canada (formerly the Royal Canadian Golfers Association) and relevant provincial, municipal and corporate (where applicable) archives as they may also prove to be useful sources of evidence. Pgl37 4.5.5 DOCUMENTING RESEARCH FINDINGS Findings in CHAPTER | two, Section 4.5 (SITE HISTORY AND INVENTORY), should be documented using narratives and period plans. 4.5.5.1 NARRATIVES Original character-defining elements of the course identified using the Inventory Tables A-K (Figures 20-30) should be documented in a narrative format. In addition, the physical history of the site and chronological evolution of the character-defining elements of the site should also be recorded in writing (Pageetai. 1998). If a multi- disciplinary team is conducting the evaluation, the golf course architect should write the narrative, since this individual will have a clear understanding of all features and their significance to the original design. Relevant graphic material should accompany the description in order to illustrate important points or to demonstrate the intricacies of an attribute that may be particularly difficult to describe in text (Page etal. 1998). 4.5.5.2 PERIOD PLANS In addition to a narrative, period plans should be used to document the nature of the changes made to golf course attributes (manipulations, additions, deletions) at each major event throughout the history of the course. Ideally, details of each period plan would be recorded digitally on AutoCAD (1:1 scale in model space) so that plans could be overlaid for analysis and evaluation (Page et al. 1998). These plans would then form the basis for the existing conditions plan that will be generated in the next section. Pgl38 4.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS This section is intended to assist in conducting appropriate research and field inventories in order to facilitate accurate documentation of the existence and conditions of extant golf course features. 4.6.1 RESEARCH Research requires a thorough review of all relevant natural resources and golf course features in order to provide a foundation for the field survey (Page et al. 1998). 4.6.1.1 DATABASES Data collection documenting existing conditions of a Thompson course should begin with a review of existing natural resources (hydrology, soils, topography etc.) from municipal or provincial databases, ideally in digital format (AutoCAD). These files should be compiled to form layers of the base map for field investigation (Page et al. 1998). 4.6.1.2 GOLF COURSE FILES Period plans described in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.5.5.2, should then be overlaid to provide a historical and evolutionary reference map of the golf course. This reference map can assist in structuring the field survey so that no character-defining elements of the golf course are missed. This is important because without a sense of the original design vision it is difficult to recognize the significance of certain golf course features. Pgl39 If the course has undergone renovations since the most recent period plan, then it will be necessary to generate a current base plan, preferably in digital format (AutoCAD), that can be confirmed in the field. The quality of available data used to generate the base plan can vary from course to course. This information often resides with the club's management or maintenance staff and can include anything from simple aerial photos to GPS generated as-built plans based on recent alterations. If data is limited, additional time may be required in order to generate a preliminary base plan suitable for use in field investigations (Page etal. 1998). 4.6.2 FIELD INVESTIGATION The field investigation requires a physical examination of the site to document the existence of all character-defining elements of the golf course and assess their physical conditions (Pageetai. 1998). 4.6.2.1 DOCUMENTING EXTANT FEATURES Data compiled in the preliminary base plan are confirmed in the field and then translated to a comprehensive existing conditions plan that is accompanied by a narrative description of the site. SCHEMATIC vs SCALED DRAWINGS Existing condition plans illustrate the location, orientation, scale and/or shape of all extant course features. Schematic and scaled drawings are two types of plans that Pgl40 can be used to convey different information about the course. Scaled drawings, though, are preferred in order to serve as a base plan suitable for future master planning (Page et al. 1998). Schematics are beneficial for understanding the conceptual organization of golf course holes and related features at all property levels, as well as their relationships to cultural and natural features of the site. However, they are often derived through observation and field notes and therefore lack the precision required in a base plan suitable for future planning (Page et al. 1998). Scaled drawings by comparison, provide exact records of all golf course features and are ideal for period and base plans. Scaled base plans can be overlain over period plans described in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.5.5.2, to confirm the existence or note the differences in location, scale and shape of all original features of the site. Data for scaled drawings can be collected using several conventional survey methods, but GPS technologies now provide an efficient, effective and relatively inexpensive means of gathering accurate data in the field (Page et al. 1998). NARRATIVE Scaled plans should be accompanied by a written report that provides a hole-by- hole description of the character-defining elements of the course from playability, aesthetic and maintenance perspectives. An explanation of the golf course and Pgl41 components as they relate to their natural context should also form part of the discussion. PHOTOGRAPHS Similar to the narrative described in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.5.1, the narrative that describes the existing conditions of the course and its character-defining elements should include images that will illustrate important aspects and nuances that may be difficult to describe in the text. For example, Thompson wrote that a green surface or bunker should tie "gracefully" (Thompson c.1930) into its immediate surrounding context. This abstract description can only be accurately illustrated through historical photographs that would provide evidence of this intent. Similarly, current photos will provide evidence of the findings for existing conditions (Page et al. 1998). Photos can be used to document the aesthetic qualities and physical conditions of golf course elements at a specific moment in time. Sequential images can provide evidence of the evolution of golf course attributes, both historically and into the future (Page et al. 1998). Digital technologies now provide an efficient and economical means of thoroughly documenting golf course attributes. To maintain consistency for the future, the camera location and direction for each important angle should be noted on a layer Pgl42 of the site plan. A catalogue of images should be compiled with each labeled according to date, hole number, features, location and angle of the photo (Page et al. 1998). 4.6.3 CONDITIONS ASSESSMENT Site research allows an evaluator/team to locate original character-defining elements of the golf course and understand their history prior to arriving at the site. The existing condition of each feature will then be assessed and rated through field investigation. The rating system employed herein is based on the United States National Parks Service system described in their Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques (CLR) and Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide (CLI) documents (refer to CHAPTER | three, Section 3.5: EXISTING CONDITIONS). However, unlike the U.S. National Park System, which evaluates the condition of the overall site, these guidelines will evaluate the condition of each extant character-defining element of the golf course to determine whether it is in good, fair or poor condition, defined as follows: Character-defining elements in good condition are those from the original design that have been carefully preserved through routine maintenance practices to ensure that their location, orientation, shape, size and aesthetic has been maintained. This category also includes elements constructed in subsequent historic periods (by others) Pgl43 that replicate the location, orientation, shape, size and aesthetic of the originals, as long as they retain their form and no intervention is necessary (Page 2001). Character-defining elements in fair condition are those original or replica features that have begun to degrade or that have been manipulated according to "natural and/or human forces" (Page et al. 1998, p67). Erosion of features like bunkers provide but one example of degradation that occurs on a course as a result of neglect or limited maintenance programs. Manipulation can take several forms as well. Two notable examples include the expansion and loss of character that can occur in bunkers due to the introduction of a mechanized 'Sandpro' and the migration of green edges to accommodate the turning radius of a Triplex mower. In all cases corrective action and/or management is necessary in order to re-establish the original size, shape or aesthetic or to repair the deterioration so that these elements will not "degrade to a poor condition" (Page 2001, p68). Character-defining elements in poor condition are those that are rapidly deteriorating and therefore require immediate attention in order "to protect and preserve the remaining historical and natural values" (Page 2001, p68). Conditions assessment should always be completed in concert with the golf course superintendent and/or their assistant as they can add a wealth of valuable information to the process. The findings of the conditions assessment should be Pgl44 recorded along with the date of the evaluation. If this was not the initial conditions assessment, a narrative should be developed to describe changes since the previous evaluation (Page 2001). 4.7 ANALYSIS & EVALUATION In Analysis and Evaluation, the data generated in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5 (SITE HISTORY AND INVENTORY) and in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.6 (EXISTING CONDITIONS) are summarized and compared so that the integrity of the character-defining elements can be evaluated. Findings from this assessment are then recorded in a statement of significance (Page et al. 1998). 4.7.1 SITE HISTORY AND EXISTING CONDITIONS SUMMARY The history, evolution and existing conditions of the character-defining elements of the golf course will have been described in detail by this point, in previous sections (4.5: SITE HISTORY and 4.6: EXISTING CONDITIONS). Therefore, the purpose of this part of the investigation is to compare original and existing character-defining elements of the golf course to develop a summary of extant features and to describe the nature of notable changes. This should be written as a narrative with supporting graphic materials to illustrate major transformations. Pgl45 4.7.2 EVALUATING HISTORIC INTEGRITY Evaluating historic integrity on a Thompson course establishes whether character-defining elements integral to conveying Thompson's original design vision continue to persist in the same form today. Essentially, an investigation of integrity should respond to the following three questions as outlined in the U.S. National Park Service Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide: 1. "To what degree does the landscape convey its historic character?" 2. "To what degree has the original fabric been retained?" 3. "Are changes to the landscape irrevocable or can they be corrected so that the property retains integrity?" (Page 2001, p79) 4.7.2.1 ASPECTS OF INTEGRITY Integrity of a site can be evaluated according to seven aspects including: location, design, environment/setting, materials, workmanship, feelings and association (Page etal. 1998, Page2001, NRB etc). Conservation literature from Canada and the United States indicates that assessment of "integrity is based on significance"(Alberta Tourism, pis), meaning that certain aspects are typically more important to the integrity assessment of a site than others depending on the significance criteria under which the property is being evaluated (Alberta Tourism, Page et al. 1998). For landscapes evaluated under significance criterion C, which is most relevant to these guidelines (as presented Pgl46 in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.1.1), aspects such as design, materials and workmanship are considered to be central to assessing the integrity of the site (Alberta Tourism). Although these guidelines assume that Thompson's golf courses are evaluated under Criterion C, as the work of a master, additional aspects such as association, location and environment or setting are considered equally important in assessing their integrity. All seven aspects have been defined in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.6.1 (ASSESSING HISTORIC INTEGRITY) and will be elaborated on herein. INTEGRITY OF LOCATION Location relates to fixed geographical coordinates that position a resource. Assessment of location requires recognizing the relationship that exists between site and resource and understanding the inherent "historical associations" that would be lost were the resource to be moved (MHPP n.d., pi3). For example, in the context of Thompson's work, a course (or portion thereof) that has been moved to a new site since its most recent period of significance (defined in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.4) would no longer reflect Thompson's design vision for the site, because the new course (or portion thereof) would have been design by another individual. Therefore integrity of the course (or portion thereof) would have been completely compromised and those effects are likely irretrievable. Pgl47 INTEGRITY OF DESIGN Integrity of design considers the designer's vision for the property as expressed through the composition and detail of landscape characteristics and character-defining elements within the site (MHPP n.d.). Assessment of design integrity can relate to spatial organization, buildings and structures, circulation, clusters, vegetation, small-scale features and land use characteristics (Page2001). As it relates to Thompson's work, integrity of design contemplates all characteristics and elements of the golf course that are identified within the inventory generated using the Inventory Tables (Figures 20-30) in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.2, that are considered to be a translation of his design principles to the natural landscape. This might include the location, orientation, shape, scale, aesthetic or spatial organization of elements such as greens, tees, fairway, hazards, vegetation or other natural course features. The deterioration, destruction or reorganization of these characteristics and elements can impact or even destroy integrity, depending on their severity and reversibility. As a rule, few and minor losses or relocation of elements normally will not have a tremendous effect on integrity of the golf course, yet a single substantial change or several smaller ones can compromise the integrity of the environment or setting (Page 2001). INTEGRITY OF ENVIRONMENT/SETTING Environment refers to the "physical setting" or the "character of the place" (MHPP n.d., pi4). Landscape characteristics most closely related include boundaries, natural systems and features (Page 2001), small-scale elements, vegetation (MHPP n.d.. Page Pgl48 2001) spatial organization and topography (MHPP n.d.). Within the property boundaries of a Stanley Thompson course the most common changes to the environment or setting result from either a natural evolution of site vegetation or alterations to the topography or spatial configuration of one or several holes or features. Topography and spatial configuration of elements such as golf holes or features are considered to be more stable than vegetation, and therefore the integrity of these features should be evaluated first. Changes to the character and spatial configuration of holes or features such as greens, tees, bunkers and fairways, can have a profound impact on the aspect of "environment" or "setting". An example of this would be visible in the case of the restoration of an eroding natural element, such as a creek or river that is integral to the aesthetic quality or strategy of a golf hole. Re-establishment of the creek or riverbank using engineered techniques like gabion walls or in more severe cases a complete realignment of the confluence, seriously compromise the aesthetic and playing characteristics of the hole. Once stable elements are evaluated vegetation can be considered, specifically whether or not it enhances the aesthetic quality of the course or detracts from its original strategic vision. Vegetation typically demonstrates a constant, consistent and predictable evolution according to seasonal and life cycles. However, over time the succession of existing or introduced vegetation can affect the aesthetic and strategic qualities of the golf course. This is normally reversible and therefore should not have a Pgl49 great impact on the integrity of environment or setting. However, a proposal to regain the integrity of vegetation in an area of the golf course may conflict with current environmental priorities or management programs. For instance, the course may have originally had very little vegetation; yet, over the years environmental programs and tree planting policies adopted by the club may have resulted in hundreds, if not thousands of trees that were never considered by Thompson as part of his original vision for the course. This vegetation can have several impacts, such as constricting areas of play, which would in turn alter the strategic intent of a hole. Removal of trees introduced after the period of significance (CHAPTER | three, Section 3.3.4) in order to reestablish the original strategy of a design, may be contradictory to the club's current environmental priorities and therefore may be eliminated as a consideration in planning alterations. INTEGRITY OF MATERIALS Materials refer to the "physical elements that were combined or deposited during a particular period(s) or time frame and in a particular pattern or configuration to form an historic resource" (MHPP n.d., pl4). On a Thompson course common materials can include, but are not limited to, stable elements, such as green profile, drainage (sub surface) or irrigation, as well as unstable elements like vegetation (species and position), grass species, bunker sands, water feature stabilization measures, bridges, stairs, shelters and other such features. PglSO Unstable elements can change according to natural progression or regular maintenance. Therefore, although a consideration, these elements would not necessarily compromise the integrity of a Thompson course. Changes to stable elements on the other hand, such as a green profile or irrigation system, can have more pronounced and measurable affects on the aesthetics and playability of the course and their overall impact on the integrity of the course would require professional judgment on a case by case basis. INTEGRITY OF FEELING Feeling refers to the ability of a resource to communicate "the aesthetic or historic sense of a particular period" through its features (MHPP n.d., pi5). This aspect of integrity is noted as having a strong connection to continued land use (Page 2001); thus, if a Thompson course were to continue to operate as a golf course then theoretically integrity of feeling associated with history would likely remain intact. However, in order for a Thompson course to convey the aesthetic sense of a specific era this may require restoring the course to the character of its period of significance. This may be unrealistic in a golf course context, simply as a result of the dynamic nature of the golf landscape. It is reasonable to anticipate that each of Thompson's golf courses will have evolved according to natural processes and therefore this should not be considered a great loss of integrity. Pgl51 INTEGRITY OF WORKMANSHIP Workmanship is considered to be "the physical evidence of the crafts of a particular culture or people" (MHPP n.d., pl4) from a specific era in history that demonstrates their unique principles and practices (MHPP n.d.). In the broad context of cultural landscapes, characteristics exhibited can range from plain, basic and traditional, to ornamental, sophisticated and innovative (MHPP n.d.). In the context of a Thompson course, workmanship refers to the construction method, resulting in particular aesthetic qualities and playing characteristics unique to his style. For instance, in their period of significance, bunkers on a Thompson golf course might have been constructed by hand and could have featured rough and ragged edges that express a raw natural aesthetic and exhibit specific playing characteristics. Integrity of workmanship can be compromised when modern technologies, such as backhoes and bulldozers, are used to restore the form of the bunkers as they are larger and are sometimes not able to re-establish the intricate detail that originally existed. Drastic changes to the aesthetic or playing characteristics of an element, such as a bunker, that occur as a result of the method used in their restoration can compromise the integrity of workmanship. Pgl52 INTEGRITY OF ASSOCIATION Integrity of association refers to a direct and recognizable connection between the property and a related person of significance (MHPPn.d.). In terms of Stanley Thompson's work, a property would be evaluated to determine the extent to which Thompson's style of design is still evident in the course. In other words, can you tell that it is a Thompson course and what are the extant features that convey this? An evaluation of integrity of association can be made based on the findings in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.7.1 (SITE HISTORY AND EXISTING CONDITIONS SUMMARY) as this summary will demonstrate the degree to which the golf course continues to represent Thompson's design intent. 4.7.2.2 ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS CONFLICTING PRIORITIES Thompson's writing provides no clear indication that he ever conceptualized the natural evolution of his golf courses. Yet, recognizing his skills as a golf course architect and his understanding of the natural environment, it is perhaps safe to assume that he would have envisioned succession of existing site vegetation and therefore would have accommodated that within the design of each hole. Historically, club policy and/or management strategies on some Thompson courses have intervened with this natural progression. Often in a noble endeavour to satisfy other priorities by implementing planting programs, the original shot values Pgl53 envisioned for certain holes have been compromised. The degree to which planted vegetation impacts the intended design must be ascertained and its reversibility assessed when evaluating integrity. In this era of environmental awareness and sensitivity, a club's desire to regain its original strategic intent can conflict with environmental policies and priorities. Therefore, it is essential to specifically outline areas of conflict so that each can be addressed on a case-by-case basis. Often, creative solutions can be employed to recover the original shot values while accommodating or even enhancing ecological systems. ADJACENCIES Adjacencies are not typically considered in the evaluation of integrity (Page 2001). However, in the golf course context, evolution of adjacent land uses can have serious impacts on playability and the aesthetic qualities of a course. It is common for the cultural landscape surrounding a Thompson course to change overtime. Consequently, views that might have been created as part of the original design could have become altered or may even cease to exist. This may or may not affect the integrity of the course depending on the importance of the views to the overall experience of the course. Pgl54 More imposing threats may be encountered when a parcel of the original property is either expropriated or sold for development. Often, when a section of the property is partitioned and sold, safety margin requirements for the adjacent holes are not thoroughly considered or understood and therefore new development (e.g. housing) is constructed within the range of shot dispersal from the adjacent holes. In many cases the onus to mitigate this new safety issue will be placed on the golf course rather than the developer, requiring them to either erect fencing or change the design and/or configuration of affected holes. Alterations can be minor affecting only one hole or a portion of it, or they may be more significant, requiring modifications to the configuration of holes. These changes are often permanent and depending on the circumstance, can have a tremendous impact on the evaluation of integrity of the site. 4.7.2.3 WRITING AN EVALUATION OF INTEGRITY Each aspect of integrity should be considered in the evaluation of integrity and should be addressed individually in a narrative. Graphic materials (e.g. historical vs. current photos, aerial photographs, plans, etc.) should be included to support the narrative in each section. Pgl55 4.7.3 IDENTIFYING CONTRIBUTING AND NON-CONTRIBUTING ELEMENTS Once the integrity has been evaluated, extant character-defining elements of the course should be labeled as 'contributing' or 'non-contributing'. Contributing elements are those identified in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.2 (GOLF COURSE INVENTORY) as having retained their integrity and therefore contributing to the significance of the golf course. 4.7.4 WRITING THE STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE The final step in analysis and evaluation is to document findings of the study and to indicate whether and how the golf course continues to convey its significance. This is described through a statement of significance (SOS) as defined in CHAPTER| three, Section 3.7.1 (STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE). The SOS is written as a narrative that begins with a summary statement, followed by a series of supporting paragraphs. The statement for a course designed by Stanley Thompson should address the questions outlined in Figure 31. Supporting paragraphs should provide detail of the historical context; define Thompson's role in the original design, renovation or addition project, as well as in each associated period of significance; and illustrate clearly how each character-defining element is a reflection of a specific Thompson principle. A chronological evolution of the site should also be included, with a brief description of the nature and extent of major events, and highlighting those that impacted Thompson's original design intent. Pgl56 Support should also orient readers Figure 31: Developing support for the Statement of Significance to the club culture as well as significant 1. Do contributing features of the golf course continue to reflect advancements in materials and technology Thompson's original design from the most recent period of significance? If not, what is the nature of the changes that may have affected design decisions. since the period of significance? 2. Define the period of significance. When was Thompson engaged to 4.8 GOLF COURSE PUNNING & design the course? When was the opening day or the latest date Thompson consulted on the design of MANAGEMENT the course? The GOLF COURSE MANAGEMENT 3. What are the characteristics and features that reflect Thompson's section translates findings outlined in the principles and therefore convey the significance of the course? Statement of Significance into actionable 4. Has the course had alteration, restoration or preservation activities? information that can be used to guide If so, have they affected/compromised the historical future master planning and management integrity of the characteristics and features that reflect Thompson's principles, thus conveying the decisions. significance of the course? How so? Who was involved? In what capacity? Do alterations reflect cohesiveness with the original craftsmanship and 4.8.1 GOLF COURSE DESCRIPTION AND BASE PLAN materials? The golf course description should 5. What were the economic, cultural and political dynamics of the golf course at its inception (ownership, provide a comprehensive picture of the membership structure etc.)? Has this changed? If so, how has this affected course and its existing conditions including: the design of the course? property location, size, setting, natural (Adapted from Page 2001, p54-SS) landscape character, outstanding natural features and all contributing character- Pgl57 defining elements (Page 2001). All extant character-defining elements should be highlighted so that they can be conserved through future management activities or alterations. In addition, every original character-defining element that has been lost or eroded over time should also be identified so that they may be considered for restoration throughout future design planning processes. This description can be written as a narrative with supporting graphic material. Golf-specific terminology should be defined in an appendix to orient the reader. A base plan should also be developed to indicate all landscape characteristics and character- defining elements described in the previous sections, including identifying elements that no longer exist, but that originally contributed to the significance of the course. Base plans should be scaled to 1:2000 to provide adequate resolution and to allow for component landscapes and component landscape features to be viewed within the context of the landscape itself. All landscape characteristics and character-defining elements shown on the plan should be identified as either contributing or non- contributing to the site's significance (Page 2001). Pgl58 4.8.2 GOLF COURSE MANAGEMENT CATEGORIES Golf course management categories are based on "management categories" defined in the U.S. National Parks Service's Cultural Landscape Inventory Procedures Guide. These categories are essentially ratings that reflect recognition of the "evaluation of significance, use, condition and location of the inventory unit" (Page 2001, P67). Identification of golf course management categories is the final step in the inventory and evaluation of a Stanley Thompson course. A category should be selected for each course based on the findings of the investigation and considering club management priorities identified in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.4.2 (GOLF COURSE MANAGEMENT SUMMARY). Golf course management categories establish a credo to guide all future design and master planning processes. The designation of a category can also provide a statement to the club membership and the public about the degree to which this particular example of Thompson's work continues to convey its significance and convey the club's priorities regarding maintaining that heritage value. Suggested categories are described as follows: Pgl59 4.8.2.1 THOMPSON ORIGINAL "Thompson Original" designation would apply if the golf course retained its significance and the priority of management at the golf course is to attempt to have the golf course recognized as a heritage site. Treatment options for a "Thompson Original" course would therefore focus on restoration and preservation (as defined in CHAPTER] three, Section 3.8.4) of its character-defining elements. 4.8.2.2 THOMPSON PREMIUM "Thompson Premium" designation would apply if the golf course reflects Thompson's original design intent with sufficient integrity and the priority of management is to retain as much of the original design intent as possible and attempt to have characteristics of the course recognized as heritage resources. 'Thompson Premium" courses would focus on preservation and stabilization (as defined in CHAPTER) three, Section 3.8.4) as principal options for the treatment of extant character-defining elements and would implement best management practices that were consistent with this initiative. 4.8.2.3 THOMPSON STANDARD "Thompson Standard" designation would apply to those Thompson golf courses whose condition makes it ineligible for "Original" or "Premium" status; however, club policies and priorities reflect an attempt to regain the spirit of Thompson's original design vision. Treatment options for "Thompson Standard" courses could include Pgl60 preservation, stabilization or sensitive restoration (as defined in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.8.4) and would also implement best management practices appropriate under the circumstances. 4.8.2.4 FORMERLY THOMPSON "Formerly Thompson" designation would apply to Thompson courses that meet any of the following criteria: a course that has lost its historical integrity and where the priorities of management do not consider Thompson's original intent; adjacent properties have been developed such that the golf course now poses a safety risk as a result of its proximity and therefore must be altered; or significant attributes of the golf course have been destroyed by natural forces. Because these courses are no longer representative of Thompson's original intent and there is presumably no aim to reinstate any of the character defining features, treatment options for "Formerly Thompson" courses could include stabilization and modernization (as defined in CHAPTER | three, Section 3.8.4). Pgl61 4.9 CHAPTER SUMMARY CHAPTER | four detailed guidelines for inventorying and evaluating golf courses designed by Stanley Thompson. The guidelines were developed based on a structure presented in Section 4.1 that was generated through a process of integration that synthesized Stanley Thompson's principles, distilled by interpretive historical research (CHAPTER | two), with the heritage conservation framework derived through a comparative analysis and synthesis of evaluation approaches (Chapter| three). Guidelines generated in CHAPTER| four will be applied in CHAPTER| five using a single scenario on one of Thompson's golf courses to provide a demonstration of the guidelines and to assess some of their capabilities and limitations as a potential tool for inventorying and evaluating Thompson's courses. Pgl62 CHAPTER I five DEMONSTRATION & DISCUSSIONS 5.0 DEMONSTRATION EXAMPLE: BANFF SPRINGS GOLF COURSE A comprehensive test of the guidelines developed through this research was beyond the scope of this study. However, it is important to understand the function and limitations of the guidelines as a tool for assessment of Stanley Thompson's work. Therefore, a sample scenario is presented in this chapter based on Banff Springs Golf Course in Alberta, Canada to demonstrate how character-defining elements related to a single Thompson design principles will be identified and subsequently assessed for integrity. This example represents one part of an overall assessment and will consider the following Thompson principle that is considered under "circulation" and "spatial organization" landscape characteristic categories at a "landscape" property level (as identified in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.2.2, Figures 20 & 22: INVENTORY TABLES A & C) Thompson principle: "The finish should be long and difficult and finishing holes should not face into the sun (west)" Pgl63 It is important to note that due to the time limitations for this part of the research, there was no comprehensive historical data retrieval undertaken to support this example. The results are therefore limited in some areas of the analysis. 5.1 GENERATING INFORMATION ON CLIENT & GOLF COURSE BACKGROUND 5.1.1 INVENTORY UNIT The golf course currently operates as Banff Springs Golf Course and was formerly known simply as Banff Golf Course. 5.1.2 GOLF COURSE MANAGEMENT SUMMARY The assessment process would normally begin with initial meeting(s) with owner(s), management committee(s), greens committee(s) and the club's historian to garner information about the history of the course and club policies and priorities regarding the conservation of this historic resource. An informal or on-line survey of the membership might also be conducted in order to understand their wants and needs. Then a review of internal historical documentation of the club would be conducted to understand the nature of the club's cultural (e.g. ownership, organizational and membership structure) and design history (e.g. renovation, best management practices, master plans). Reviewing the internal records of the club would also provide a sense of the amount of primary evidence that would be readily available to support the assessment and how much additional research would be required. Internal Pgl64 documentation to be reviewed can include historical and current, photos, plans (e.g. original and all subsequent renovations), minutes from committee meetings and so on. Because this example is meant simply as a demonstration and will not entail a full examination of the course, there have been no meetings with club stakeholders other than a site visit with the golf course superintendent, Bob Burrows, in September 2009. 5.1.3 HISTORICAL SUMMARY 5.1.3.1 PERIOD OF SIGNIFICANCE In this section, it is important to clearly describe the time in which Thompson can be directly connected to any aspects of planning, design, layout, construction supervision or consulting on the property in question in order to establish its period(s) of significance. Ideally, the club's historical records would include minutes from meetings, construction contracts, signed and dates plans, sketches, drawings and specifications for Thompson's original design. This would provide evidence that could be used to define the period(s) of significance definitively. In the absence of primary evidence, secondary sources such as articles in golf magazines may be sufficient to establish the start and end dates the period(s). Since comprehensive data retrieval and analysis was not undertaken prior to developing this example, it is uncertain what primary evidence exists within the club records at Banff or in the Canadian Pacific Hotels (owner/developer of the project) Pgl65 archives. However, Banff Springs Golf Course was one of Thompson's most notable designs and a number of articles and publications have been written describing the club's history. Because this sort of information was more readily available through the Stanley Thompson Society collection at the University of Guelph archives, it forms the basis for defining the period of significance for this course. Cohen and Crabtree (2006) indicate that various sources of data can help to enrich the results of qualitative research, however, as experienced in this example, sources can also be conflicting and therefore can cause confusion when attempting to establish definite parameters such as in the case of period of significance. For examples at Banff Springs Golf Course a recent course guide (Archival Reference #16) states, "in 1926 Stanley Thompson, Canada's preeminent golf course architect, was commissioned to create what many believe is his finest work and one of the most memorable and scenic golf courses in the world". Meanwhile an article in the Saturday Evening Post (June 8,1946) entitled, He Drives Golfers Crazy on Purpose (Archival References #17) says, "in 1924, Thompson undertook his most Herculean task-the building of the Canadian Pacific Railway's $1,000,000 course at Banff'. Furthermore, recognized historian and author of The Toronto Terror, James Barclay (2000) suggests, "CPR took back the course, and in 1927 hired Stanley Thompson to come up with plans for an 18- hole course...The new 18-hole course was opened in 1929" (pi64-i65). Pgl66 In the absence of empirical evidence, with conflicting information such as this, professional judgment is required to arrive at start and end dates to define the period. In this case, the period of significance that would encompass all of Thompson's efforts related to the course design including planning, design/layout and construction supervision was therefore established as 1926-1929. There is no evidence to suggest that Thompson later renovated Banff Springs Golf Course, however in other cases where he returned to the site at a later date to alter or add to the original works, there would be multiple periods of significance. 5.1.3.2 MAJOR ALTERATIONS As this demonstration example does not provide a comprehensive review of the course, a full investigation has not been completed into the nature and extent of all major events throughout the history of the course. However, a site visit and discussions with current golf course superintendent, Bob Burrows, supported by the published golf course history of Banff Springs (E. J. Hart 1999), reveal a few significant alterations throughout the latter part of the twentieth century that have had significant impacts on the course and its adjacent lands. Burrows and Hart both suggest that Banff Springs Golf Course remained relatively untouched for decades after it was constructed. Hart (1999) indicates that the first of a few major changes to the course occurred in 1987 when the 9-hole "Tunnel" course was designed and built by Cornish & Robinson, directly adjacent to the Pgl67 Thompson course and inside the original loop. Subsequent alterations included that restoration of the "Cauldron" by RobertTrent Jones Jr. in 1994 and a renovation of the greens, tees and fairways on the Thompson layout by Les Furber and Jim Eremko between 1996 and 1999 (Hart 1999). 5.1.3.3 SCOPE OF WORK As described in CHAPTER | four. Section 4.4.4, the scope of work is normally defined by the scale and complexity of the site. Because this example is not bound by formal constraints of the assessment process the scope of the work will not be defined. However, under normal circumstances the evaluator would develop the scope of work by considering the following: Establish the physical size (in acres) of the property being evaluated regardless of whether it is the entire course, one nine on the course, or just a hole or two Define the study boundary at site and regional scale (as described in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.4.4.1) Describe the physical character and ecological systems of the site 5.1.3.4 ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE Banff Springs Golf Course has been corporately owned and operated since Thompson was commissioned for the design in 1926-1927, by Canadian Pacific Hotels Ltd. (Barclay 2000, Hart 1999) and now by Fairmont Hotels (Hart 1999). Pgl68 5.2 SITE HISTORY AND INVENTORY The site history section of the guidelines has been designed to inform the evaluator of the historical context for Stanley Thompson's works and then to assist in developing a comprehensive inventory of original character-defining elements that conveyed Thompson's vision for the site. Ideally, a comprehensive inventory would be based on an examination of the original routing plan, hole-by-hole sketches, site notes, construction specification and site and aerial photos taken around the time of construction. In this case, a brief review of the background materials reveals not only the nature of Thompson's original design for the course, but that two golf course architects had worked on the site previous to Thompson, including Donald Ross (Hart 1999). Once a comprehensive review of the background information has been conducted then the original design is dissected and evaluated. The guidelines provide a sequential approach to identifying and documenting original character-defining elements on a golf course with the assistance of 11 inventory tables (CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.2.2, Figures 20-30). This example will demonstrate the process of collecting inventory by focusing on Thompson's design principle that states, "the finish should be long and difficult and finishing holes should not face into the sun (west)". This was based on Thompson's philosophy that "no one should win a game on an easy hole" (Thompson c.1930, pl2). The Pgl69 principle is considered under both "circulation" and "spatial organization" landscape characteristic categories at a "landscape" property level (as identified in CHAPTER| four, Section 4.5.2.2, Figures 20 & 22: INVENTORY TABLES A & C). Circulation is addressed in Inventory Table A of the guidelines (CHAPTER] four, Section 4.5.2.2, Figure 20). The U.S. National Park Service defines circulation as 'the spaces, features, and applied material finishes that constitute systems of movement in the landscape'. On a golf course this can include not only the roads, paths and trails designed to move pedestrian or automobile traffic through the site, but also the routing of the golf holes which organizes a player's journey through and experience of the landscape, based on a designer's vision. Therefore, as it relates to the design principle in question, one consideration for identifying relevant character-defining elements of the course would be to: describe the distribution of par and handicap on each hole throughout the original routing. This will be addressed in the following section 5.2.1. Spatial organization is the focus of Inventory Table C of the guidelines (CHAPTER| four, Section 4.5.2.2). In the context of a Thompson course this would refer to relationships between major features of the site including (but not limited to) the holes, clubhouse and practice facility, as well as the visual connections between them and to the surrounding context. As it relates to the design principle in question one consideration relevant when identifying character-defining elements would be to: document the character of the first hole and finishing sequence and describe their Pgl70 relationships to the clubhouse. This consideration will be addressed further in section 5.2.2. 5.2.1 CONSIDERATION Ul: Describe the distribution of par and handicap on each hole throughout the original routing. Thompson's original routing plan (Figure 33) for "Banff Golf Course" was examined for the purposes of this example in order to understand Thompson's vision for the routing. Because the design principle relevant to this example focuses on the closing holes of the course, character and distribution of par and handicap will only be examined for the final holes of the course. CAeo At Banff Springs GC, five of Thompson's /*7*fcM? 2wJ//ff£^ final six holes were the longest on the course lis- Yos. PA£ ft* YOSTPAB i 3SS 4 10 330 4 th 2 3i>0 4 // 4SO 5 with the 18 hole thirty-five yards longer than 3 400 4 12 /3S 3 4 S3S S 13 SltS 5 any other par four on the course and playing S 330 4 /4 245 3 6 JSS 3 JS 4,* 4 7 4AS S lit 4lfS S even longer into the prevailing winds. S IbS 3 17 SOS 3 3 4SO £ 18 44S 4 Thompson's closing sequence provided 33*5-37 3285 - 3b 3345-37 7omis M30-73 challenge and variety in par and a rhythm Figure 32: Scorecard from Thompson's created by a repetition of par 5, par 3, par 4 in original design of Banff Springs GC (Source: Mr. Jack Young) sequence to avoid monotony on the course. Pgl71 I ' .%/ t? I I , ; » 8 • ' '' V 1 Soil/ J y/$>>,/' J,& v.«0' --V-A mm -BANFFGOLFCOISE- L<: 0 _onwf)tr •ClWfflglW Ml* Figure 33 Stanley Thompson's original routing of Banff Springs Golf Course Pgl72 (Original bluepnnl courtesy of Mi lack Young) 5.2.2 CONSIDERATION #2: Document the character of the first hole and finishing sequence and describe their relationships to the clubhouse Whenever documenting the character of an element or feature, hole or sequence of holes, it is optimal to be able to refer to Thompson's original records (including: site notes, construction details and specifications or post construction reports) in order to develop a high degree of resolution and confidence about the character-defining elements that are visible within the landscape as a translation of Thompson's design principle. However in this instance primary documentation was not available, therefore the character of the first and final holes was derived from the published history of Banff Springs and through the researchers professional experience. Hart (1999) states that at Banff Springs Golf Course, Thompson felt that nature "had been kind" and thus he sought to capitalize on the stunning features and character of the setting to create some of the most tremendous golf experiences in Canada (p20). Upon examining the site, Thompson felt that there were valuable areas of the property that had not been in the previous Donald Ross design therefore, he wasn't interested in merely renovating Ross's design, rather he wanted to create something special (Hart 1999). Pgl73 One area that Thompson felt would provide an exceptional experience was the terrain where the first and final holes of the course were eventually laid out (Han: 1999), as highlighted in Figure 34. At that time the area was a campground, however Thompson was so adamant that this portion of land was essential to his design that he convinced Canadian Pacific to acquire it (Hart 1999). Figure 34: Thompson's original routing plan with newly acquired lands highlighted (Original blueprint courtesy of Mr. Jack Young) Hart (1999) said "Thompson envisioned his opening hole set into the bank of the Spray [River] immediately below the hotel with a carry from the elevated tee to the fairway across the sparkling Spray below" (pi7). This elevated tee would have created a sense of empowerment even if the first ball were not tremendously well struck. Hart (1999) also commented that this tee location captured "one of the most breathtaking views on the whole course toward Mount Rundle and up both the Bow and Spray Valleys" (p2i). Pgl74 •"S. «r 1 i-t-**; >i.V*J* * <3>fSW; . -i*?,^ Figure 35:1st tee, Banff Springs Golf Course (c. 1930) (Source- STS Collection, UoG Archive) The position of the first tee set directly adjacent to the clubhouse also provided a premium gallery setting to watch players tee off. In addition, the newly acquired property allowed Thompson to position and orient the 18th hole (Figure 36) to capture the Banff Springs Hotel as the terminating view on the hole. Pgl75 •'-•'i; • ATS ...... X * * j , ft t ' i 4 »i c , + j ...... m. 1,—Ai. ,' Bl£*~^M*» * . *.ij Figure 36: Approach to the 18th green, Banff Springs Golf Club (c. 1930) (Source STS Collection, UoG Archive) The sense of arrival created through this visual connection between the golfer and the Banff Springs Hotel on the mountainside in the distance was tremendous and provided one of the most spectacular and memorable finishes in Canadian golf. Pgl76 5.3 CHRONOLOGY AND PHYSICAL HISTORY Normally, a complete examination would be conducted to identify all major and minor alteration events throughout the history of the course as well as any policies or maintenance decision (e.g. tree planting plans) that might have affected the original- defining elements of the design collected through the inventory process (as outlined in CHAPTER | four, Section 4.5.2). This example will focus only on the direct and profound impacts that occurred as a result of the Cornish Robinson addition of the "Tunnel" nine in 1987. Details of historical alterations, policy changes and maintenance practices can be found by examining club records and documentation from the alteration process, however, golf course members, superintendents, long-time staff and/or individuals involved in alteration projects (e.g. golf course architects, engineers etc.) can also be valuable resources. This section of the example relies primarily on Hart's (1999) published history of Banff Springs Golf Course. Pgl77 EVENT #1: • Construction of the 9-hole 'Tunnel" course • New Clubhouse • Thompson Course Rerouted DATE: 1987 ASSOCIATED PARTIES: Cornish & Robinson DESIGNATION: Golf Course Architects DESCRIPTION OF WORK: According to the published history of the club, golf course architects Geoffrey Cornish and Bill Robinson commenced construction on the new "Tunnel" nine at Banff Springs Golf Course in 1987 as a single component of an overall development plan conceived by Canadian Pacific Hotel's vice-president, Ivor Petrak. Petrak's vision for the future of the course, in addition to the Tunnel nine, included a new clubhouse centrally located on the property, a change to the order in which the golf holes of Thompson's original routing would be played and eventually an additional nine holes to make the course 36 holes in total (Hart 1999). Petrak clearly recognized the club's potential and was making efforts to capitalize on the popularity of the course. DESIGN IMPLICATIONS: The new clubhouse was situated at the center of the property and with Tunnel nine (highlighted in Figure 37) designed to occupy the vacant land inside the loop of the Thompson golf course (Hart 1999). Together, these additions resulted in significant physical, visual and experiential impacts on the adjacent Thompson course. Pgl78 Figure 37: Layout of the Tunnel' nine at Banff Springs Golf Course (Original blueprint courtesy of Mr. Jack Young) Without conducting a thorough examination of the property or of all historical documentation, it is difficult to assess all impacts of the new nine, clubhouse and practice facilities on Thompson's original design at a component landscape feature scale. However there are obvious design implications at landscape and component landscape levels that can be identified with little additional evidence required. For example, the 5th hole of Thompson's original nine was destroyed by this addition and replaced with two parallel par 4s (Hart 1999). Once the additions were completed, the sequence of Thompson's layout was altered and one of the parallel par 4s became the first holes of the new Tunnel nine and the other, the first hole of the newly sequenced Thompson course (Hart 1999). In addition both nines on the Thompson course now began and ended at the new clubhouse, as did the Tunnel nine (Hart 1999). Pgl79 5.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS Typically this section of the assessment would involve two components, research and field investigation. Research normally requires a thorough investigation of natural resource maps as well as historical data outlining features of the site that are important in its history in order to develop a base map of significant elements that can be confirmed in the field. Because this example deals with the closing sequence from a playability perspective and with the opening and closing holes from an experiential perspective, it will rely on official golf course documentation as well as field notes and photos from a field investigation performed in September (2009) to demonstrate the point. The reconfiguration of holes is most relevant in this example because it not only changes the strength of the closing sequence from a playability perspective, but it also alters the experience on both opening and closing holes. Current golf course material as well as site notes and photos from the field investigation in September 2009 are used to demonstrate the impacts of the Tunnel nine and clubhouse additions in 1987. PglSO 5.4.1 CLOSING SEQUENCE, POST 1987 RENOVATIONS Upon completion of the additions in 1987, holes on the Thompson course were reconfigured to form two nines, each beginning and ending at the new clubhouse location. The Thompson course continues to be played according to this arrangement today. The closing sequence on the current layout consists of one par 3, four par 4s and one par 5, in that order. The string of par 4s offer variety in their length, however two of the final three holes ranked among the easiest on the golf course. Figure 38 and 39 illustrates the spatial organization and playing characteristics of final sequence after the reordering of holes in 1987. Figure 38: Closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course post 1987 renovations (Original blueprint courtesy of Mr. Jack Young) HOLE CURRENT YARDS PAR HANDICAP RANKING 13th 225 3 16 Longest par 3 14th 440 4 2 3rd longest par 4 15th 475 4 4 longest par 4 16th 414 4 12 3rd shortest par 4 17th 374 4 18 2nd shortest par 4 18th 578 5 6 2nd longest par 5 Figure 39: Scorecard for closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course post 1987 renovations (Source: 2009 Banff Springs Golf Course official scorecard) Pgl81 5.4.2 FIRST HOLE, POST 1987 RENOVATIONS Currently the Thompson course at Banff Springs begins with a new hole constructed by Cornish & Robinson in 1987 (Figure 40) as one of two parallel holes that would replace Thompson's original #5. The hole is flat and relatively innocuous, but requires an accurate opening drive as it is constrained by a stand of dense pines to the right and by the first hole of the Tunnel course to the left. Figure 40: Thompson course, l" hole, post 1987 renovations (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Cornish & Robinson clearly attempted to enhance the margin of separation between the two holes by integrating modern and symmetrical looking mounding at the left side of the fairway. The tees are elevated just slightly above fairway level and the golf hole itself is somewhat removed from the activity of the clubhouse and practice facilities. Pgl82 5.4.3 18TH HOLE, POST 1987 RENOVATIONS Currently, the course finishes on the fourth hole of Thompson's original layout. Although it is the second longest par 5, it ranks as only the sixth most challenging hole on the golf course. This hole (Figure 41) features a dogleg right and tremendous views of the distant snow capped peaks. Figure 41: Thompson course, 18th hole, post 1987 renovation (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) 5.4.4 CONDITIONS ASSESSMENT The conditions assessment examines the state of important physical elements within the golf course. Because this example doesn't deal with specific tangible attributes, this section of the evaluation will not apply in this instance. Pgl83 5.5 ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION In this section, Thompson's original intent for the sequence of holes as well as the first and final holes of the course is compared with the existing conditions so that integrity can be evaluated. 5.5.1 SITE HISTORY AND EXISTING CONDITIONS SUMMARY 5.5.1.1 SEQUENCE OF HOLES Thompson's original design at Banff Spring demonstrated his principle of creating a "long and difficult" finish by creating an arrangement of closing holes that not only offered variety in length and par, but also provided the longest and most challenging sequence on the course. Players would require stamina to the finish in order to overtake a competitor as five of the six final holes were in fact the longest or second longest of their category (par) on the course. Now four of the six closing holes are par 4s and three of the six are ranked among the easiest on the golf course. This reordering of holes has clearly changed the flow of the routing by shifting Thompson's grueling yet exciting climax to earlier in the round and ending instead with a series of weaker holes. Pgl84 Figures 38 and 42 illustrate how the physical flow of the final sequence of holes has changed from Thompson's original design to their current configuration. Figure 42: Thompson's original closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course (Source: adapted from image on Banff Springs Golf Club website) Figure 38: Closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course post 1987 renovations (Original blueprint courtesy of Mr. Jack Young) Pgl85 Meanwhile, excerpts from the original and current scorecards for the course in Figures 39 and 43 demonstrate the difference in playing characteristics of the final sequence of holes from Thompson's original routing to its current arrangement. HOLE ORIGINAL YARDS PAR RANKING 13th 565 5 Longest par 5 14th 245 3 Longest par 3 15th 415 4 2nd longest par 4 16th 465 5 2nd shortest par 5 17th 205 3 2nd longest par 3 18th 445 4 Longest par 4 Figures 43: Thompson's original scorecard for the closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course (Source: Thompson's original routing plan scorecard) HOLE CURRENT YARDS PAR HANDICAP RANKING 13th 225 3 16 Longest par 3 14,n 440 4 2 3rd longest par 4 15,n 475 4 4 longest par 4 16th 414 4 12 3rd shortest par 4 17th 374 4 18 2nd shortest par 4 18,n 578 5 6 2nd longest par 5 Figure 39: Scorecard for closing sequence at Banff Springs golf course post 1987 renovations (Source: 2009 Banff Springs Golf Course official scorecard) Pgl86 5.5.1.2 THE EXPERIENCE AT HOLES #1 AND #18 Hart (1999) indicates that in Thompson's initial survey of the site, he recognized the development (or end-use) potential not only of the site but also that of certain adjacent parcels of land. One parcel of land that he grew a great fondness for was the tract upon which he built holes #1 and #18 of the golf course (as highlighted in figure 34) (Hart 1999). This piece of land featured spectacular views, elevation change and proximity to the hotel, an ideal site for captivating opening and closing holes on a world-class golf course! COMPARISON OF THE IST HOLE OF THOMPSON'S ORIGINAL ROUTING VS. THE 1ST HOLE, POST 1987 RENOVATIONS Thompson's original first tee, perched high above the first fairway, provided the player with a feeling of empowerment and a sense of connection not only to the golf course, but also to its surrounding context with spectacular views to Mount Rundel and through the Spray and Bow River corridors (Hart 1999). This hole appears to have been literally carved out of the forest, drawing the player in to begin their journey through the majestic landscape. The post 1987 opening hole contrasts in all regards with that of Thompson's design. The only similarity is the mountains in the background. Figures 40 and 44 demonstrate the difference in character between holes. Pgl87 •-,> <.•",-•> *-*\ .^.^{^i Figure 44: l" hole of Thompson's original design (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Figure 40: Thompson course, Is hole, post 1987 renovations (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Pgl88 The proximity of Thompson's original first tee to the clubhouse also offered a wonderful gallery venue for people to mill about and watch players tee off. The post 1987 tee is removed from the clubhouse activities and confined by space, thus limiting the gallery potential. The first tee at Banff was a significant to the way in which golfers were introduced to the journey through Thompson's design at Banff. Banff Springs golf course's longtime head golf professional, Malcolm Tapp, referring to Thompson's original design commented "its world renowned to have a tee like this" (as cited in Hart 1999, p47). In the researcher's opinion, this opening shot was one of the most memorable in Canadian golf. COMPARISON OF THE 18TH HOLE OF THOMPSON'S ORIGINAL ROUTING VS. THE 18TH HOLE, POST 1987 RENOVATIONS In his original design, Thompson created a tremendous sense of arrival using the historic Banff Springs Hotel as a terminating vista beyond the hole; an experience that was lost once the course was rerouted. The view on the new 18th, although spectacular and beautiful, does not necessarily provide the same powerful sense of arrival that Thompson had created in playing in toward this historic landmark. Figures 41,45,46 and 47 illustrate the comparison of the approach and sense of arrival between the two finishing holes. Pgl89 K<* ef* ft Figure 45:18th hole of Thompson's original design (Source Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Figure 41: Thompson course, 18 hole, post 1987 renovation (Source Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Pgl90 ****- * »mfv?A« C Figure 46: The approach shot to Thompson's original 18l green (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) raKTiiw 1 i * * Figure 47: Thompson course, approach shot to the 18 green post 1987 renovations (Source: Kirsten Brown, September 2009) Pgl91 5.5.2 EVALUATING HISTORICAL INTEGRITY To reiterate, this example addressed: LANDSCAPE CHARACTERISTICS: Circulation Spatial organization PROPERTY LEVEL: Landscape level THOMPSON PRINCIPLE: "The finish should be long and difficult and finishing holes should not face into the sun (west)" CONSIDERATIONS: Ul. Describe the distribution of par and handicap on each hole throughout the original routing. #2. Document characteristics of the first hole and finishing sequence and describe their relationships to the clubhouse In this example, Banff Springs Golf Course was assessed to identify characteristics of the course that represent the translation of Thompson's design principle related to the challenge and experience of the finish of a golf course. Relevant considerations were addressed in order to identify appropriate character-defining elements. The challenge, length and playing characteristics of component landscapes that compose the closing sequence of holes are in fact the character-defining elements that translate Thompson's principle of a long and difficult finish. Meanwhile the visual connections, the elevation changes and the proximity of the opening and closing holes Pgl92 to the clubhouse are the characteristics that create sensational experiences on the opening and closing holes of this course. This example provides a unique scenario because it does not relate to physical change to features and elements that alters the player's experience of Thompson's original design, but rather the order in which the player experiences elements and features of the course in their journey throughout the landscape. So, does this affect the integrity of Thompson's original design? In the guidelines, evaluation of integrity responds to the following three questions as originally outlined by Page (2001). • "To what degree does the landscape convey its historic character?" • 'To what degree has the original fabric been retained?" • "Are changes to the landscape irrevocable or can they be corrected so that the property retains integrity?" (Page 2001, p79) A comprehensive analysis of the property is required in order to determine the overall integrity of the property, however this example can be used to comment on whether or not the experiential changes described herein detracts from the integrity of Thompson's original design or not. In its current configuration, Thompson's intended journey through the landscape is not experienced, thus affecting the aspect of "feel" of Pgl93 the course. However, the component landscapes that compose the closing sequence on the golf course as well as the first and final holes do continue to persist in their original locations. The change to the order of holes is reversible and as a matter of fact it is played on occasion in the original order from "heritage tees", which are meant to be close to the original yardage of the course. Therefore this particular change to the order of the holes in itself does not constitute a permanent loss of integrity at Banff Springs Golf Club. The purpose of this example was to demonstrate the process of identifying and documenting character-defining elements, to assess their current conditions and to evaluate their integrity. The final steps of the investigation as outlined in the guide (CHAPTER| four, Sections 4.7.3: Identifying Contributing and Non-contributing Elements, 4.7.4: Writing a Statement of Significance and 4.8: Golf Course Planning and Management) each require results from a comprehensive investigation and therefore they will not be addressed as part of this example. Pgl94 5.6 DISCUSSION OF THE GUIDELINES Although a full test of the guidelines was beyond the scope of this study, using them to generate the previous demonstration example has revealed a great deal about the complexity of this integrated assessment process and about the functionality and clarity of the guidelines themselves. The guidelines provide a systematic approach to inventorying and evaluating features and elements of a Thompson course that convey its significance. The overall process described in the guidelines is fairly straightforward due in large part to the fact that they are based on previously established mechanisms for cultural landscape assessment developed by the U.S. National Park Service. However, a new level of complexity has been added to the process with these guidelines as they have been focused specifically to assess the intricacies of an individual designer's work. 5.6.1 INVENTORY TABLES Inventory Tables provide an evaluator with a sequential process for identifying and documenting all significant character-defining elements of the course. This ensures that all elements integral to conveying the Thompson's original vision will be captured within the inventory. The process used to develop the demonstration example revealed that inventory tables could be further refined in order to demonstrate a clear relationship between Pgl95 each Thompson's design principles and its respective character-defining element(s). At the moment, each table is associated with a specific landscape characteristic and property level. Within each table, Thompson principles relevant to the landscape characteristic and property level are listed in the center column and considerations to be contemplated in order to collect appropriate character-defining elements for the inventory are listed in the right column. As a consequence of the demonstration example it has been determined that these tables should be refined so that specific considerations are associated with each Thompson design principle, rather than in their current format, simply listing them all as a group. This would allow for explicit connections to be formed between each Thompson's design principles and its respective character-defining element(s) so that the nature of their relationship can be conveyed. 5.6.2 COMPREHENSIVE STUDY Attempting to develop a demonstration example that considered a single Thompson principle was challenging because major alterations can have complex implications that affect several character-defining elements. In other words, it was difficult to focus on one scenario in a vacuum. Therefore, the guidelines should perform at their best when the scope of the study entails a comprehensive evaluation of the entire 9,18, 27 or 36-hole course and ancillary facilities. In this way the richness and complexity of the site will not become diluted. Pgl96 5.6.3 ACCESS TO INFORMATION The depth and resolution of the investigation will be limited by the type and quality of historic materials available upon which to base and inventory and site history. 5.6.4 EXPERT-BASED APPROACH Finally, the demonstration example confirmed that professional judgments would be required occasionally throughout application of the guidelines in identifying certain character-defining elements of the site. For example, the 'sense of arrival' created by Thompson on his original 18th hole, as described in the example, is described primarily as a visual connection to the Banff Springs Hotel. How is this defined? Where is the evidence? Answering these questions becomes subjective and requires individuals with a focused set of skills to ultimately interpret the course and the historical evidence appropriately. 5.7 CHAPTER SUMMARY Because a comprehensive test of the guidelines was beyond the scope of this study, this chapter sought to demonstrate the process whereby character-defining elements related to a single Thompson design principle would be identified and documented and their integrity evaluated. This scenario illustrated the specialized nature of the guidelines as tool capable of generating high-resolution results, however, at the end of the day, a thorough test of the guidelines will be necessary in order to fully understand their effectiveness, reliability and validity. Pgl97 CHAPTER I six RESEARCH SUMMARY 6.0 COMMENTS ON THE RESEARCH As presented in CHAPTER | one, the goal of this thesis research was to develop guidelines that would contribute to conserving features integral to expressing Stanley Thompson's design vision. This effort was undertaken in response to an identified need for a landscape assessment methodology specific to heritage golf courses. The research was refined to focus on the work of Stanley Thompson, as he is Canada's foremost Golden Era golf course architect. The objectives of this thesis were to: 1. Examine Thompson's professional records to extract his design principles 2. Review important concepts in heritage conservation theory, summarize and compare current policies and best practices from Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom and synthesize most relevant concepts to develop a conservation framework; 3. Integrate Thompson's design principles with the conservation assessment framework to formulate guidelines that contribute to identifying and evaluating the significance and integrity of original and extant features of his designs. Pgl98 Two distinct studies were undertaken (CHAPTER | two: Stanley Thompson: Context and Principles and CHAPTER| three: Heritage Conservation Framework Development) to fulfill the first two research objectives. Results from each were subsequently integrated to generate the assessment guidelines in CHAPTER| four to satisfy the final objective of the study. In CHAPTER | two a historic context was developed that would establish the heritage significance for Thompson's work. In doing so, this thesis research documented Thompson's importance to the field of golf course architecture and to Canadian history through a unique study of his contributions and influence (e.g. Score Golf Magazine top 100 golf course ranking review). The historic context created can serve not only as a background for writing the statement of significance for each of his courses, but can also provide a basis for comparison to the work of other Golden Era designers. In addition, CHAPTER | two fulfilled the first objective of the thesis by distilling Thompson's design principles from his published and unpublished records. These principles represent a unique contribution because they have been extracted directly from primary evidence (Thompson's own writing) using a scholarly method of historical research, rather than based solely on secondary sources. Pgl99 CHAPTER I three, contributes to conservation literature by examining how current heritage conservation concepts and methods can be adapted for this specific landscape type. Golf courses have not yet been addressed in the field of conservation and this study provides guidance for others interested in conserving this typology and more specifically the works of Stanley Thompson. In CHAPTER| four, the historical context and design principles generated in CHAPTER | two were integrated with the conservation framework developed in CHAPTER| three to develop the guidelines. The guidelines represent a unique contribution to the fields of golf course architecture and heritage conservation because they not only consider landscape characteristics normally contemplated as part of the traditional assessment of heritage landscapes, but they also consider character-defining elements that reflect the translation of a specific designer's principles to the natural landscape. Pg200 6.1 LIMITATIONS AND FUTURE WORK Reflecting on the study, some limitations are evident. Limitations arose primarily because the scope of the research became unexpectedly large, due in part to the researcher's lack of previous knowledge in the field of heritage conservation and to an unanticipated discovery, which revealed that Thompson had never formally outlined his design principles. As a consequence, sections of the research became constrained by time, however the limitations provide some interesting opportunities for future work. For example, in CHAPTER| two, the historical research conducted to extract Thompson's principles relied solely on primary evidence from a single source, that of the Stanley Thompson Society Collection at the University of Guelph Archive. According to Cohen and Crabtree (2006) of the Qualitative Research Guidelines Project, this narrow approach to data collection may have compromised the richness of the results. They suggest instead, using multiple sources and types of evidence to enhance the qualitative analysis, a concept known as triangulation (Cohen & Crabtree 2006). Recognizing this, further research could be conducted to refine and enrich the design principles distilled in CHAPTER | two. This would involve using the same methodology for historical research as outlined in part two of the chapter and integrating similar types of data from several additional sources. Sources could include provincial and municipal archives, the Canadian National/Pacific Railway Archives, the Royal Canadian Golfers Association Archives, the National Archive of Canada as well as business and/or archival records for as many of Thompson's courses as possible. Pg201 In CHAPTER | three, the summary and comparison of assessment methods was based on government-generated, expert-based approaches. Future work could consider a broader range of assessment methods, including those employed by professionals and in previous scholarly work, to provide a more comprehensive heritage conservation framework. In addition, expert-based approaches used to develop the conservation framework, may have resulted in guidelines that are too complex for use by the average golf course stakeholder. Future work research could focus on creating a simplified version of the guidelines as a companion document for stakeholder use. In CHAPTER | four, a guideline structure is defined and the details of the guidelines are presented, and although their function is demonstrated briefly in CHAPTER| five, a comprehensive test of the guidelines did not fall within the scope of the research. Future work could test and evaluate the guidelines through application on at least two Thompson courses and through an external review by industry experts (in golf course architecture and heritage conservation), in order to fully comprehend their effectiveness, reliability and validity as a specialized tool to evaluate Thompson's work. Pg202 6.2 CONCLUSIONS To conclude, this section will reflect on the relevance of the study, not only to the conservation of Stanley Thompson's work but also to the fields of golf course architecture and landscape architecture and to heritage conservation. The research design employs a unique multi-study approach that provides an alternative method for studying complex designed landscapes. Each chapter is distinct and has the potential to contribute to one or more fields, including landscape architecture, golf course architecture or heritage conservation. For example, the methodology used to extract Thompson's design principles in part two of CHAPTER] two, could be used as a basis for distilling the principles of other golf course designers or landscape architects who may never have previously defined their own design principles. Guidelines developed through this research were designed specifically to contribute to the conservation of Thompson's courses, by producing a baseline of information that has the potential to enlighten golf course stakeholders about the significance of their golf course; to guide club management philosophies regarding conservation; and to inform master planning and management processes. Recognizing that golf courses are living organisms that evolve continually in response to natural forces and human interventions, the researcher does not assume, nor would it be practical for a club to attempt to capture a Thompson course in its original state as it Pg203 was on opening day. However, it is anticipated that the knowledge generated through an assessment using these guidelines would help guide master planning or long-term management strategies to ensure that the essence of Thompson's original vision for the course is respected. Collectively, assessments of this nature, on every confirmed Thompson course could contribute significantly to conserving his entire body of work. This has relevance for all Canadians, golfers and non-golfers alike, who have an interest in conserving Canada's heritage landscapes, as his body of work represents arguably one of the country's largest collections of designed historic landscapes. The guidelines are designed to assess a specific landscape typology (golf courses) and are focused to consider the works of a particular designer, which has never been addressed in the fields of golf course architecture, landscape architecture or heritage conservation. In the broader context, these guidelines could be of interest to conservation advocacy groups concerned with protecting the legacy of other historically significant Golden Era golf course designers and even landscape architects, as they would provide a basis for similar focused assessment methodologies. Like Thompson, those other designers have substantial bodies of work that contribute to the fabric of the cultural landscape throughout North America and around the world and thus warrant similar conservation efforts. Pg204 References American Society of Golf Course Architects (ASGCA) Website (n.d.). Accessed January 5, 2010, from http://www.asgca.org/index.php?option=com_content&view=article &id=47<emid=28. Andrus, P. W. (1999). National Register Bulletin 40: Guidelines for Identifying, Evaluating and Registering America's Historic Battlefields. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved February 26, 2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/publications/bulletins/pdfs /N RB40.pdf. Barclay, J. A. (2000). The Toronto Terror. Chelsea, Ml: Sleeping Bear Press. Birnbaum, C. A. (1994). Preservation Brief #36: Protecting Cultural Landscapes Planning Treatment and Management of Historic Landscapes. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Accessed October 29, 2009 from http://www.nps.gov/hps/tps/briefs/brief36.htm. Birnbaum, C. A. & Peters, C. C. (Eds.) (1997). Standards for Treatment of Historic Properties, with Guidelines for the Treatment of Cultural Landscapes. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Pg205 Bolan, B. G. (n.d.). National Register Bulletin 32: Guidelines for Evaluating and Documenting Properties Associated with Significant Persons. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved February 26, 2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/publications/bulletins/pdfs/nrb32.pdf Busha, C. H. and S. P. Harter. (1980). Research Methods in Librarianship: Techniques and Interpretation. New York, NY: Academic press. Butteriii, J. (2006). Writing Statements of Significance. Winnipeg MB: Parks Canada. Retrieved October 27, 2009 from http://www.historicplaces.ca/downloads /SOS%20guide%20-%20Eng.l2.06.(pdf).pdf. Cohen, D. and Crabtree B. (2006, July). Qualitative Research Guidelines Project: Triangulation. Robert Wood Johnson Foundation. Accessed June 20,2010, from http://www.qualres.org/HomeTria-3692.html. Cornish, G. S. and R. E. Whitten. (1993). The Architects of Golf: A Survey of Golf Course Design from its Beginnings to the Present, with an Encyclopedic Listing of Golf Architects and their Courses. New York, NY: Harper Collins. Council of Europe (2000). European Landscape Convention, Florence 2000: European Treaty Series - No. 176. Accessed March 2010 from http://www.coe.int/t7dg4/ cultureheritage/heritage/landscape/default_en.asp. Pg206 Dictionary.com. [a] (n.d.). Significance. Accessed May 5, 2010 from http://dictionary. reference.com/browse/significance. Dictionary.com. [b] (n.d.). Master. Accessed July 7, 2010 from http://dictionary.reference.com/browse/master Donovan, K. (2004-2005A). Thinking Down the Road: Stanley Thompson, Canada's Golf Architect, Artist and Visionary, 1893-1953. In S. Donovan (Ed.), The Nashwaak Review (Vol. 14/15, pp. 252-302) Fredericton, New Brunswick: St. Thomas University. Donovan, K. (2004-2004B). An Interview with Geoffreys. Cornish: Stanley Thompson and the Construction of Cape Breton Highland's Links, Ingonish, Cape Breton, 1938-1939. In S. Donovan (Ed.), The Nashwaak Review (Vol. 14/15, pp. 322-387) Fredericton, New Brunswick: St. Thomas University. Edwards, C. (2009, November). The Evolution of the Golf Ball. Accessed January 5, 2010 from http://www.articlesbase.com/golf-articles/the-evolution-of-the-golf-ball -1431858.html. Finley, T. (1999). The Early History of Golf. Excerpt from Golf in the Upstate, Since 1895. Greenville, SC: Olde Sport Publishing. Accessed January 5,2010, from http://www.finleyongolf.com/articles/TheEarlyHistoryofGolf.htm. Pg207 Forrest Richardson & Associates website. (2009). Golf Holes: Their Strategy. Excerpt from Routing the Golf Course. Hoboken NJ: John Wiley & Sons. Accessed July 7, 2010 from http://www.golfgroupltd.com/writings/golf_holes.html Golf.com. (n.d.). Golf Magazine's Top 100 Golf Courses in the World. Accessed December 7, 2009 from http://search.golf.com/top-courses-and-resorts/ top-100-world-courses2009.html?No=80&sid=1256B605D556&Ntk=main&Nr= AND(P_RankYear:2009)&Nr=AND(P_RankYear:2009)&Ntx=mode%20matchallpar tial&N=0&Nf=P_RankWorld | LT%20101&Nf=P_RankWorld | LT+101&Ns=P_ RankWorld%7cO&Nty=l. Golf Club Atlas Website, (n.d.). Banff Springs Golf Course: Alberta, Canada. Accessed January 2010, from http://golfclubatlas.com/courses-by-country/ canada/banffspringsl. Golf Association of Ontario, (n.d.) Ontario Golf Hall of Fame Inductees. Retrieved May 29,2010, from http://www.gao.ca/index.php/ci_id/1834/la_id/!. Golf Travel Scotland, (n.d.). History of Golf. Accessed December 14,2009, from http://www.golfing-scotland.com/history.asp. Graves, R. M. and G. S. Cornish. (1998). Golf Course Design. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Pg208 Graves, R. M. and G. S. Cornish. (2002). Classic Golf Hole Design: Using the Greatest Holes as Inspiration for Modern Courses. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Groat, L. and D. Wang. (2001). Architectural Research Methods. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Hart, E. J. (1999). Banff Springs Golf. Banff, Ab: E J H Literary Enterprises Ltd. Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada (HSMBC). (2001). Assessing Sites Associated with Persons of National Significance. Ottawa, ON: Author. Retrieved October 28, 2009 from http://www.pc.gc.ca/clmhchsmbc/crit/crit3_e. asp#assessing. Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada (HSMBC). (n.d.). Evaluating Canadian Architects. Accessed December 22,2009, from http://www.pc.gc.ca/ clmhc-hsnbc/crit/crit4_E.asp. Historical Rules of Golf Pages, (n.d.). On the Putting Green. Accessed May 27, 2010 from http//www.ruleshistory.com/green.html Jones, R. T. (1988). Golfs Magnificent Challenge. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill. Kelley, B. (n.d.). History FAQ: Original Rules of Golf, When Were the First Rules of Golf Developed? Accessed January 5,2010, from http://golf.about.com/ cs/historyofgolf/a/hist_firstrules.htm. Pg209 MacWood, T. (n.d.). The World's Finest Tests. Accessed December 7, 2009, from http://golfclubatlas.com/in-my-opinion/tom-macwood-the-worlds-finest- courses Marshall, C. and G. B. Rossman. (1989). Designing Qualitative Research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. McClelland, L. F., Shull, C. D. and J. Charleston. (1997). National Register Bulletin 16a: How to Complete the National Register Registration Form. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved February 27, 2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/publications/bulletins/pdfs /nrbl6a.pdf. McClelland, L F., Keller, T. J., Keller, G. P. and Z. Melnick. (1999). National Register Bulletin 30: Guidelines for Evaluating and Documenting Rural Historic Landscapes. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved January 16,2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/ publications/bulletins/pdfs/nrb30.pdf. Mendik, K. R. (2007, March). The Challenges of Restoring a Classic American Golf Course. Retrieved June 7, 2010, from http://golfclubatlas.com/in-my-opinion/kevin- mendik-challenges-of-restoring-a-classic-american-golf-course. Pg210 Mingay, J. (2006, April). Stanley Thompson. Golf Course Architecture. Accessed January 2010, from http://www.golfcoursearchitecture.net/Article/Stanley- Thompson/1074/Default.aspx. Municipal Heritage Partnership Program (MHPP). (n.d.). Evaluating Historic Resources in Alberta. Retrieved October 29, 2009 from http://www.assembly.ab.ca/lao/ library/egovdocs/2007/alts/173390.pdf. Noble, B. J. Jr. and R. Spude. (1997). National Register Bulletin 42: Guidelines for Identifying, Evaluating and Registering Historic Mining Properties. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved January 18, 2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/publications/bulletins /pdfs/nrb42.pdf. Page, R. R., Gilbert, C. A. and S. A. Dolan. (1998). A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved February 27, 2010 from http://ia331429.us.archive.Org/0/items/AGuideToCulturalLandscapeReports/ AGuideToCulturalLandscapeReports_text.pdf. Page, R. R. (2001). Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service Pg211 Paine, C. and J. Talyor. (1995). Cultural Landscape Assessment: A Comparison of Current Methods and their Potential for Application within the Niagara Escarpment. Guelph, Ontario, Canada: Landscape Research Group, School of Landscape Architecture, University of Guelph. Palmquist, M. (n.d.). Content Analysis. Accessed February 12, 2010, from http://www.ischool.utexas.edu/~palmquis/courses/content.html. Parks Canada (2003). Standards and Guidelines for the Conservation of Historic Places in Canada (Ed. G.W. Fulton). Ottawa, Canada: Author. Retrieved October 27, 2009 from http://www.historicplaces.ca/nor-sta/pdf/sgnld_e.pdf. Patton, M. Q. (1980). Qualitative Evaluation Methods. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. Potter E. W. and B. G. Bolan. (1992). National Register Bulletin 41: Guidelines for Evaluating and Registering Cemeteries and Burial Places. Washington D.C.: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. Retrieved February 26, 2010 from http://www.nps.gov/history/nr/publications/bulletins/pdfs/nrb41.pdf Primary Sources at Yale. (n.d.). What are Primary Sources? Retrieved February 12,2010 From http://www.yale.edu/collections_collaborative/primarysources/ primarysources.html#books_a. Pg212 Richardson, F. (2002). Penal, Strategic and Heroic - Redefined. In P. Daley (Ed.) Golf Architecture: A Worldwide Perspective (Vol. 1, pp. 70-74). Victoria, AUS: Full Swing Publishing. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 100 Golf Courses in Canada. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/previous-rankings.cfm. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golf's Top 100 Golf Courses in Canada in 2006. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/ranking/toplOO/ Top-100-golf-courses-in-canada-2006. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 100 Golf Courses in Canada in 2004. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/2004-top-100. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 100 Golf Courses in Canada in 2002. Accessed December 4, 2009from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/2002-top-100. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 100 Golf Courses in Canada in 2000. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/2000-top-100. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 50 Golf Courses in Canada in 1998. Accessed December 4, 2009from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1998-top-50. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golf's Top 50 Golf Courses in Canada in 1996. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1996-top-50. Pg213 Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golf's Top 50 Golf Courses in Canada in 1994. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1994-top-50 Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 25 Golf Courses in Canada in 1992. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1992-top-25. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golf's Top 25 Golf Courses in Canada in 1990. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1990-top-25. Score Magazine, (n.d.). Score Golfs Top 15 Golf Courses in Canada in 1988. Accessed December 4, 2009 from http://scoregolf.com/rankings/1988-top-15. Scottish Golf History 2003-2007. (n.d.). Derivation of Golf Tee. Accessed May 27,2010 from http://www.scottishgolfhistory.net/tee_term.htm. Settled: Gleneagles, high praise for mountain resort links. (1928, September 22). Special to Edmonton Journal, no page noted. Shackelford, G. (1999). The Golden Age of Golf Design. Chelsea, Ml: Sleeping Bear Press. Shackelford, G. (2005). Lines of Charms: Brilliant and Irreverent Quotes, Notes, and Anecdotes from Golf's Golden Age Architects. Ann Arbor, Ml: Sports Media Group. Stadler, C. (n.d.). The Evolution of Golf Course Design: A Basic Understanding of the Penal, Strategic and Heroic Design Schools of Golf Course Architecture. Accessed December 14,2009, from http://www.eigca.org/Article/EIGCA10889.ink. Pg214 Stanley Thompson Society, (n.d.). Stanley Thompson's Disciples Chart. Retrieved December 7, 2009, from http://www.stanleythompson.com/files/stanley- thompson-disciples-chart.jpg. Swanwick, C. [1] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland. Prepared on behalf of the Countryside Agency and Scottish Natural Heritage. Swanwick, C. [2] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland; Topic Paper 5: Understanding Historic Landscape Character. Prepared on behalf of the Countryside Agency and Scottish Natural Heritage. Thomas, G. C. (1997). Golf Course Architecture in America: Its Strategy and Construction. Chelsea, Ml: Sleeping Bear Press. Thompson, S. (c.1930). About Golf Courses: Their Construction and Up-keep. Toronto, On: Rous & Mann Limited Wexler, D. (2000). The Missing Links: America's Greatest Lost Golf Courses and Holes. Chelsea, Michigan: Sleeping Bear Press. Wexler, D. (2003). Lost Links: Forgotten Treasures of Golfs Golden Age. Chelsea, Ml: Clock Tower Press LLC. Wikipedia. (n.d.). Gutta-percha. Accessed January 5,2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org /wiki/Gutta-percha Pg215 Archival References 1. S. Thompson to JF Dawson Esq. from Olmsted Brothers Re: Landscaping Grounds at Capilano, 5 March, 1936, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020001, File 1113, Folder 84, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 2. S. Thompson, Report on Site Visit: Capilano, August 1936, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020001, File 1113, Folder 84, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 3. S. Thompson, Preliminary Report: Maritime Golf Course, 4 June, 1938, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 8, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 4. S. Thompson, Contract and Specifications for 18 hole golf course at Cape Breton Highlands National Park, 24 June, 1938, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 8, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. Pg216 5. S. Thompson, Contract Specifications and general details covering construction for 18 hole golf course: "the Links" at Green Gables at Prince Edward Island National Park, 24 June, 1938, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 2, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 6. S. Thompson, Specifications for completion of golf course at Cape Breton Highlands National Park at Middlehead, Ingonish, November 1938, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 8, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 7. S. Thompson, Report on Rehabilitation work: Jasper Park Lodge, 23 February, 1944, Thompson Business correspondence, Microfilm reel RG84T-10435, Volume RG 84-A-2-a 187 File Part 1, Mikan No. 838211, National Archives of Canada. 8. S. Thompson, Follow up report: Anne of Green Gables, Prince Edward Island, December 1946, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 2, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. Pg217 9. S. Thompson manuscript, Conference paper: "Chart Illustrating the Balance and Sequence of Holes: Amplifying address by Stanley Thompson on "The Fundamentals of Golf Course Architecture", 11 February, 1948, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 10. S. Thompson, Construction specifications for golf course at New Brunswick National Park, 1 May, 1948, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 15, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 11. S. Thompson, Follow up report: Anne of Green Gables, Prince Edward Island, 8 June, 1949, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 2, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 12. S. Thompson, Report: Fundy National Park Golf Course, Alma N.B., 31 October, 1949, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder 15, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. Pg218 13. S. Thompson, Construction Specifications: North Oaks Golf & Country Club, St. Paul, Minnesota, 13 June, 1950, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020002, File 1114, Folder8, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 14. S. Thompson, Construction specifications for a 9 hole golf course at Marathon, Ontario, 28 June, 1951, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020013, File 1115, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 15. S. Thompson, Original Notebook - 29 sketches and notes related to 2nd nine at Sunningdale GC, 26 August, 1934, Thompson Business correspondence, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020003, File 1115, Folder 1, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 16. Banff Springs golf course guide, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, XL1 MS A020022, File 15a, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. 17. Article "He Drives Golfers Crazy on Purpose", Saturday Evening Post, 8 June, 1946, Stanley Thompson Society Collection, Archival and Special Collections, University of Guelph Library. Pg219 APPENDIX A | ANALYSIS OF SCORE GOLF MAGAZINE COURSE RATINGS 1988-2008 Appendix A summarizes the top golf courses in Canada as ranking biannually by Score Golf Magazine to determine the number of courses that can be attributed to Stanley Thompson in each rating year. Course Ranking 1988 1990 1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 1 2002 2004 2006 2008 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 s ™ .3 14 z •1 15 -. __ •H 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 : 37 "• _ 38 _ 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 ™ 47 ^m 48 •• 49 50 51 52 ••1 Pg220 53 54 55 56 57 • 58 ^^ 59 M -. 60 61 62 63 64 mi 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 warn 76 77 78 79 80 ™ 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 ! 100 • 27% 20% 24% 19% 18% 18% 14% 19% 12% 12% 14% ^_^__ Stanley Thompson Course Other Golden Era designers Architecture post 1960 (Data source: Scoregolf.com) Pg221 APPENDIX B | ANALYSIS OF SCORE GOLF COURSE RATINGS 1988-2008 Appendix B summarizes the top golf courses in Canada as ranking biannually by Score Golf Magazine to determine the number of courses that can be attributed to Thompson or any of the ancestors of his design tree in each rating year. Course Ranking 1988 1990 1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ^" 14 15 16 • 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 — 37 • 38 s- . 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Pi " 48 •• 49 50 51 Pg222 52 53 ^••1 54 55 56 57 • 58 59 -. 60 [ 61 62 63 64 ml 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1 ™ 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 33% 52% 60% 49% 54% 52% 61% 1 69% | 57% 53% 60% |_H_| Stanley Thompson Course L,._„.J Golf course designed by Stanley Thompson Disciples Other Golden Era Oesigners (Data source: Scoregolf.com) Pg223 APPENDIX CI Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Coding primary evidence Appendix C demonstrates coding of the data extracted from Stanley Thompson's publication and manuscripts, using "indigenous" and "analyst-constructed" categories (as described in CHAPTER | two, Section 2.5.3, Example lb) DOCUMENT CODE: SDCBl DOCUMENT: Descriptive General Specifications: Eighteen hole golf course, Cape Breton Highland National Park. June 24,1938. 'Owing to the unique ruggedness of the terrain over which the course is to be built, and due to the fact that most of the land is now timbered, preventing actual visualization of topographical features, it is felt that no hard and fast specifications should be laid down covering the formation of greens and bunkers and the other numerous details which are so important in incorporating character and individuality into this course.' 'the course will measure approximately 6100 yards from the forward tees and 6600 yards from the long tees' (RT) 'there will be 1800 sq ft of teeing surface to each hole divided into one, two or three areas.' (T) 'fairway clearing will vary from 150 feet to 250 feet depending upon the length and characteristics of the hole.* (PL) (F) 'the knolls and depressions will be excavated and filled and top dressed to create an easily mowable surface.' (MT) (SH) 'necessary bunkering will be done to produce additional playing character.' (PL) (B) 'fittingly contoured to present playing variety. They will have an average playing surface of approximately 6000sqft'(PL)(G) 'the sides and rough bordering the fairways will be cleared of all underbrush and loose debris for a distance of 30 feet back, so as to present a neat attractive appearance.' (AS) (V) 'the course, when completed, will be of championship caliber, and will be of such pleasing landscape throughout as to mark it as being a course of distinction.' (AS) (L) Pg224 DOCUMENT CODE: SDCB2 DOCUMENT: Contract specifications for completion of Golf Course (2nd 9 holes - Holes No. 5,6,7,8,9,10,ll,12and 13)... Cape Breton Highlands National Park at Midlehead, Ingonish. Post Nov 1938. Tees: 'Will average 1800 square ft of teeing surface to each hole, which may be divided into two areas...level to be determined at the discretion of the architect' (PL) (T) 'where tees are built up to improve visibility...' (PL) (VS) (T) 'side slopes (tees) will conform to a 2:1 slope as a minimum except where built on precipitous ledges' (M) (T) Rough: 'Will extend, unless otherwise specified, for 75 yards in front of the back tees and for 10 yards on either side of the fairway and around greens.' (PL) (AS) (MT) (R) Fairways: 'will average 65 yards in width' (PL) (F) Bunkers: 'will be constructed at such locations as golf architecture deems advisable...all bunkers will be sanded or grassed as conditions suggest'. (PL) (B) The slope will be such as to permit of the operation of mowers' (MT) (B) Green: 'will be built at the locations as shown on plan, except than topographical features might suggest slight variations in this respect.' (PL) (MT) (G) 'Greens will average 6,000 square feet of putting surface. Total putting area for the nine holes will not be less than 54,000 square feet, minimum size for any one green not to be lower than 4,500 square feet.' (PL) (G) 'slope at back and sides of green will be shaped to tie gracefully with the surrounding contours and general setting.' (AS) (G) 'slopes will be long to permit of ease in mowing' (MT) (G) "When topsoil for greens and tees is borrowed from locations outside the golf course, the ground from where the borrowing takes place should be leveled off, and if necessary, drainage provided to prevent the lodging of water. (FN) (SH) 'Care should also be taken that the beauty of the land is not marred' (AS) (SH) Shelters: 'will be of attractive log construction of rustic type' (AS) (P) Paths and Steps: 'all required paths leading from green to tees on the next fairway, will be cut out and leveled without introducing the type of path formality that too often fails to blend with existing scenic conditions.' (AS) (P) 'and will be so graded as to make it harmonize with the landscape' (AS) (P) Pg225 'where advisable, steps built of native timber will be provided to service the tees.' (AS) (P) Footbridge: 'will be built of native timber* (AS) (P) Underb rushing: Care will be taken not to damage any tree growth around existing clearings. The branches will be left feathered down to the ground. There will be the most aesthetic treatment possible of all tree life.' (AS) (V) DOCUMENT CODE: SDMO DOCUMENT: Specifications for the construction of a 9-hole golf course at Marathon, Ontario. June 28, 1951. Tees: 'two tees to each hole located wherever possible, at different angles so as to give variety* (PL) (T) 'at least 2000 sq ft of teeing area for each hole' (FN) (T) 'slopes of the sides of the tees will be drawn out so that they can be cut mechanically" (MT) (T) 'tees will be graded flat on the site' (PL) (T) 'Where necessary to improve visibility they will be raised.' (PL) (T) Greens: 'the putting surfaces of the greens will vary between 4000-7000 sq ft' (PL) (G) Fairways: 'the fairways at the 200 yard mark will average 65 yards width' (PL) (F) Practice fairways: 'a practice fairway and practice putting green will be built as shown on the plan. This green will be 6000 sq ft in area and the practice fairway will have a wide tee, so that several golfers will play at one time.' Rough 'rough with the exception of the first hole, will extend 75 yards in front of the tees and for 10 yards on each side of the fairway and around the back of the green' (PL) (R) Bunkers 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain (AS). The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically (MT). The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of his bunker (PL). All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with course sand found on the property.' (PL) (B) Paths 'Paths will be cleared between tees and greens and treated with a coarse sand into which will be mixed a certain amount of clay to give solidity. (FN) The paths will not be cut straight, but will meander through Pg226 the woods. (AS) (P) Bridle paths will be created throughout the course and connect to a path that is suggested be built from the townsite to the golf club house. DOCUMENT CODE: SDNB DOCUMENT: Construction Specifications: New Brunswick National Park, May, 1948 Selection Criteria confirmation: signed by Stanley Thompson Tees: 'tees will have a playing surface of 1500 to 2000 Sq ft depending on the length of the hole They will be divided into two areas, a back and a forward tee The slope of the sides of the tees where practicable will be a one to five grade so as to permit ease of cutting.' (T) Greens: The greens will average 5,000 sq ft of putting surface depending on the length of the shot. For shape see individual sketches.' < (G) Rough: 'All rough for 20' back from the edge of the fairway will be cleared of dead branches and debris and hand raked. 'All poplars, shrubs and alders will be cut out of the edge of the rough on the edge of the clearing and the spruce, birch, maple mountain ash and feature trees brought into relief.' (V) Fairways: 'will start 75 yards in front of the back tees;' - (R) and average 65 yards in width. (F) On all doglegs the fairway will be as wide as staked...all sharp undulations will be taken out of fairways so that the fairway mowers can cut the area without scalping' (SH) Bunkers: Bunkers will be molded on the sides, staked and the grass slopes of all bunkers will be quite flat, one and five if possible to permit care in cutting. ' • The bunkers will be seeded with the same mixture as the rough. •'••'•' ;'!••' * Bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 6" with coarse water washed sand.' (B) DOCUMENT CODE: SDNO DOCUMENT: Construction Specifications: North Oaks Golf & CountryClub, St. Paul Minnesota. June 13,1950. Tees: 'tees will average 3000 square feet of teeing space to each hole, divided into two playing areas (FN). Tees on the flat will be built up sufficiently to provide good drainage only (FN)...where however the forward tee is in the line of play from the back tee, it will be kept lower...' (PL) (T) Greens: 'greens will be built generally as shown on the plan. They will average 6,000 sq ft of putting surface (PL). Slopes at back and sides will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours (AS). Where greens have to be built up, they will be so designated in the hole by hole detail. Separate construction sketches of the greens will be supplied' Fairways: 'Fairways will commence 75 yards in front of back tees (PL) (R) and will average 60 yards in width' (PL) (F) Rough: Pg227 'the area lying 75 yards in front of tees and 10 yards on either side of fairways and around greens' (PL) (R) Bunkers: 'Fairway bunkers and mounds will be built at locations shown on plan and where they jut into fairways the grades of slopes will be such as to permit ease of cutting.' (MT) (B) Landscaping '...rather than rows of trees delineating fairways, all plantings should be done in groups or clumps as indicated on plan.' (AS) (V) 'Planting of flowering shrubs as well as trees around tees will, in a few years, make a very attractive display.' (AS) (L) Paths and walks 'four foot wide path will be built on easy grades from greens to tees (FN) (P) and foot bridges will be constructed to cross the streams where necessary.' DOCUMENT CODE: SDPEI DOCUMENT: Contract Specifications and general details covering construction of 18 hole golf course: "The Links" at green gables at Prince Edward Island National Park. June 241938. Tees pi Average 1800 sq ft per hole 'divided into two areas'. (FN) Tees sometimes built up to improve visibility. (PL) Tees located in the sand dunes 'cribbed in creosoted logs, trees or old beams'. (AS) (T) Rough: pi 'will extend, unless otherwise specified, for 75 yards in front of back tee and for 10 yards on either side of the fairways and around greens.' (PL) (R) Fairways p2 'will commence 75 yards in front of back tee and will average 65 yards in width.' (PL) (F) Bunkers p2 'will be constructed at locations shown on the plan. Slopes should be long so as to enable fairway mowers to cut well up on their banks (MT). Bunker walls and slopes will be seeded with same mixture and at same rate as rough (AS) (PL). All bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 8" with good course water- washed sand (PL). Stone may be used to fill in the walls of bunkers.' Greens p2 'will be built on sites staked and will average 6000 square feet of putting surface (PL). Slope at back and sides of greens will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours, and setting (AS). Slopes will be long and stones may be used as fill on mounds...' Streams p3 Throughout the property will be allowed to take their natural course but where there is likelihood of erosion, banks will be straightened and slopes lengthened. (AS) (WF) Underbrushing p3 'care must be taken not to trim trees around existing clearings. The branches must be left feathered down to the ground' (AS) (V) Pg228 DOCUMENT CODE: RCAP DOCUMENT: Thompson Jones & Company; Report on Capilano - site visit August 1936. XLIMS A020012 Trees: Hole 1 - 'underbrush and remove windfalls, cut stumps close to ground for 30' both sides of fairway.' (AS) (V) Hole #2 - 'General clearing note', 'unless clearing is done thoroughly; by this I mean removal of windfall and stumps, it is much better to leave the bush in its natural state' (AS) (V) Hole #4 - 'Clean up island between 4 and 12 And BEHIND 3 GREEN, REMOVING ALL LOGS AND WINDFALLS, LEAVING THE YOUNG GROWTH. UNLESS this can be done properly, leave it in the raw state. (AS) (V) Hole #6 - 'improve area left rear of green, (this area is a piece of scabby clearing and it would have looked better in its natural state)... plant more extensively behind green' (AS) (V) Water features: Hole 11 - 'pond must be scaled to make at least 50% of pond visible from the back tee' (AS) (WF) Greens: Hole 11 - 'observe sun conditions and report whether more trees than those already blazed have to be removed around this green to admit afternoon sun.' (MT) (G) Fairway: Hole 10 - 'remove boulder outcropping on this fairway. This applies to all boulders throughout the course' (AS) (MT) (PL) (F) Hole 12 - 'create flat bench 75' back from stream' (PL) (F) Bunkers: Hole 17 - 'build another bunker left front and improve lines of bunker right front' Hole 18 - 'bunker at left side of fairway opposite green approach' (PL) (B) DOCUMENT CODE: RFNP DOCUMENT: Report: Fundy National Park Golf Course Alma N.B. October 3l", 1949. Bunkers: 'see that sand in the bunkers is raked occasionally. Do not cut the bunkers with a straight edge. Runners of grass or points of sod in the bunkers tend to improve their appearance and take away artificiality.' (AS) (B) Pg229 DOCUMENT CODE: RJNP DOCUMENT: Report on Rehabilitation work: Jasper Park Lodge. February 1944. Recommendations for Experience l" hole 'the starting and finishing arrangements are not good at jasper. The golfer should be directed on To the first tee and off the eighteenth green. This can be done by having directive planting (AS) (L)_.The area of the first tee and present practice green would be raised 18". There would be three levels to the first tee, one on the raised portion, one on a level with the existing tee and a third one forward on the level of the fairway (PL) (T).' 'Suitable shrub planting would be made around the clubhouse, first tee, practice green and practice tee. What is not plain would become an attractive landscape features (AS) (L).' Fairway 3rd - The slope at the end of the drive has always been annoying and unfair to the average golfer. It should be lengthened (PL) (F), topsoiled and properly grassed' 4th - 'allow the fairway at right side of green to grow into rough' 8th - 'at the pass, 200 to 290 yd mark, lower the right side of fairway and put fill obtained at left side; this to create a flat playing area at this point' (PL) (F) Green 3rd - 'the green has not enough putting surface and is obscured by mound at left front. This mound should be flattened and the putting surface enlarged 1000 sq ft by building up to the right and to the rear.' (PI) (G) 9th - 'see that lip at sides of green is restored, if anything increased 6" to 1'.' 11* - 'build a new green at this hole. This could really be an outstanding hole with such a background as Pyramid. The green surface is obscured from the end of the drive. The green should be raised on an average of 3' and the back built up, taking pyramid mountain as a model for the molding.' (AS) (PL) (G) 15* - 'the Bad Baby is an unfair hole for the average golfer, but presents few difficulties to the crack. It is proposed to enlarge the left hand side of this green and the bunkers at this point and to put a pot trap at the right front. The immediate approach to the green at the right will be made easier for those adept at the sneak and run pitch' (PL) (G) Tees 4th - 'round front of lower tee when reseeding' (AS) (T) 14th - 'the present tee is too small and there is no way of extending it to the rear. We suggest a peninsula be built out into the lake 20 yards to the left and rear of the existing tee. This peninsula should have a surface of 3000 sq ft (FN) and the path that runs around the lake will have a branch leading on to it so that pedestrians on a walk around Lac Beauvert can use it as a stopping off and resting place...it will make an attractive landscape feature and be much appreciated by those other than golfers (AS). The carry from this tee will be no longer than the carry from the present tee for it is proposed to build the shore out slightly to shorten the carry. It will really be easier to play from than the old tee, for instead of playing at an angle across the water to the fairway, the shot from the proposed tee to the fairway will be square on (PL). Pg230 Bunkers 5th - 'the bunker in the centre of this fairway has always been unfair since the left rout was cut off. This bunker should now be removed and another built at the left side of the fairway, 200 to 275 mark. (PL) (B) Green: 13th - 'this is a plain looking hole, especially at the mound just before the green. The charm of this hole is the blind green surface. A golfer walks over the last rise expectantly to see what treatment the obscure rolls have given his ball. This feature must be left in the hole... (AS) (G) It is respectfully suggested that this hole would be greatly improves if a pass were created at the centre of the fairway, the 500 yard mark and the dirt mounded at either side. This would make the top of the flag and the heads of the players visible, it would also improve the appearance of the hole and take away some of the danger.' (PL) (G)...'Note: we are aware that there are those who want nothing done with this hole; but this change should be made.' DOCUMENT CODE: RMGC DOCUMENT: Preliminary report: Thompson Jones 8> Co. LTR to Mr. Gibson, Director of Lands, Parks & Forests Branch, Department of Mines & Resources: re: Maritime Golf Course. June 4th, 1938. Prince Edward Island National Park. Dalvay Hourse 'the area, while extensive enough, is low lying and flat, and the soil shows only average fertility. The landscape, other than the beach, is not particularly attractive. If a golf course were constructed here the character would have to be built in artificially, which would be costly and not very interesting to play. The area with its fine beach and buildings is suitable for a community playground, but it lacks the natural character so necessary to a good golf course.' (SS) Stanhope Beach There is considerable acreage around the hotel already in grass and, while sufficient contiguous land could be acquired, it is not the type most suitable for golf. The panorama is grand but the area is windblown. It is felt considerable artificial character would have to be added to make a golf course, and this coupled with the cost, makes this site undesirable.' (SS) Cavendish - Green Gables This site, some 300 acres, extends from a sand dune ridge fronting the ocean, back into a wooded farmland. It is traversed by two brooks, has a number of springs and a fresh water lake of approximately 30 acres. The soil for the most part is in good till. The contour and variety of the terrain is ideal for the development of a fine golf course at a comparatively small cost. This coupled with the fact that the community round about is pastorally beautiful and has been the subject of a noted 'best seller*, should prove of interest to tourists. I have therefore no hesitation in recommending the establishment of the golf course on the property known as Green Gables.' {SS) Cape Breton Highlands national park 'I have looked thoroughly over the available sections and having regard to all conditions, chose the site known as 'Middle Head - Clyburn Brook' as the most suitable. This area provides craggy cliff land, sandy shore, wooded valley land traversed by a river. I know of no place on the whole Atlantic Sea Board where such a variety of terrain can be found in so limited an area. While it will be quite costly a golf course thereon, I think the exceptional conditions warrant a substantial expenditure. The whole park is superb and I venture to say, being close to the vast population of the Eastern States, will prove to be the most heavily patronized in the Canada parks system. Pg231 DOCUMENT CODE: RPEI1 DOCUMENT: Report: Prince Edward Island National Park "Anne of Green Gables" Golf Links This report was written to describe the status of the course post-war and the treatments that would be required to reinvigorate the course - based on site visits by ST June 1946 and Norman Wood October 1946. Bunkers '...the sand areas of the bunkers in some instances can be reduced but care must be taken to see the sand is well flashed up on the slopes so as to make the bunker stand out' (AS) (B) DOCUMENT CODE: RPEI2 DOCUMENT: Report: Anne of Green Gables Golf Course, Prince Edward Island, June 8,1949 From hole by hole report Hole #11 'the bunkers surrounding this green should be well flashed up to bring the surface of the green into relief. As a matter of fact, on most of the bunkers around the course the grass has been allowed to encroach on the sand area so that they are no longer resemble what they originally were.' (AS) (B) Hole #12 'the bunkers on this hole should be flashed with sand. They are not in good condition and make the hole look ragged' (AS) (B) Hole #15 'a new ladies tee should be built at the level of the fairway far side of the bridge which crosses the stream (PL) leading out of the lake of Shining water into the ocean...wherever tees are built on the course, make sure if possible to have the slopes long as this makes for ease in maintenance.' (MT) (T) Hole #16 'this hole has a little too much character in the surface. It seems to have settled badly" (PL) (SH) 'there should be a little clearing done at the left front of #16 tee. The brush between the bay of the lake and the tee has grown up at this point and makes the hole look too formidable.' (PL) (V) DOC CODE: CASH DOCUMENT: Amplifying address by STANLEY THOMPSON on "The Fundamentals of Golf Course Architecture" (including Chart Illustrating the Balance & Sequence of Holes): given before the Green keeping Superintendents' Association of the United States of America, Detroit. Feb 11,1948 THE IDEAL SEQUENCE 'Easy start, Difficult Finish* (PL) (RT) -first hole should be a par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion (PL) (RT) -short and long and easy and hard holes should all be fairly evenly distributed throughout the round (PL) (RT) Pg232 HOLE LENGTH PAR HANDICAP HOLE LENGTH PAR HANDICAP 1 340 4 16 10 355 4 13 2 400 4 8 11 490 5 9 3 460 5 14 12 170 3 17 4 385 4 12 13 445 4 1 5 145 3 18 14 590 5 5 6 530 5 2 15 195 3 15 7 415 4 6 16 370 4 3 8 220 3 10 17 245 3 7 9 430 4 4 18 475 5 11 OUT 3325 36 IN 3335 36 OUT 3325 36 TOTAL 6600 72 'holes at which strokes are given, should be most difficult holes to score on, having regard to prevailing winds, uphill grades and other local conditions and not based solely on length' (PL) (RT) 'Strokes should be equally distributed between nines. The first stroke should be given on the second nine and the second stroke not earlier than the third or fourth hole of the first nine.' (PL) (RT) A note about the stroke distribution; it appears that all of the odd strokes have been given on the back nine and the even stroke given on the front in an alternating fashion. IDEAL LENGTH FOR 18 HOLE GOLF COURSE Showing area of greens in relation to length of hole Hole# Length Par Putting surface area (Sq ft) 5 145 3 4000 12 170 3 5000 15 195 3 6000 8 220 3 7000 17 245 3 8000 1 340 4 4500 10 355 4 5000 16 370 4 5500 4 385 4 6000 2 400 4 6500 7 415 4 7000 9 430 4 7500 13 445 4 8000 3 460 5 4000 18 475 5 5000 11 490 5 6000 6 530 5 7000 14 590 5 8000 6600 72 110,000 'or an average of approximately 6000 sq ft per green' (PL) (FN) (G) Pg233 DOCUMENT CODE: BCCAP DOCUMENT: Business Correspondence: Letter to JF Dawson Esq., Olmsted Brothers, Landscape Architects Re: Landscaping Grounds at Capilano. Brookline, Massachusetts. March 5,1936. Landscape 'with regards to the landscape of the course, I deem this of utmost importance. When I visited the property, I found the gardener, who I think is a very competent man, planting shrubbery more or less promiscuously at various points around the course. I tried to guide him, but landscape is not my fort (think he meant forte), and I gave him the meager notes attached merely to direct him until such time as you go out. You will note we suggest that on your next trip you give your ideas on golf course plantings for I feel I have gone further than I had wished to (AS) (L) but did so in order to keep mistakes down to a minimum until such time as they confer with you' DOCUMENT CODE: ASFN 1-29 DOCUMENT: Original Sunningdale Notebook-2nd nine drawn by Stanley Thompson 1934 Handwritten & sketched by Stanley Thompson (confirmed match on hand writing) 'Completion notes2nd nine'-August 26/1934 Green #1 'Create mound in centre and develop terrace at right side about one foot higher than left side and sharpen mound at right rear. Eliminate long bunker at left side (as originally planned) make wall of bunker at left front steeper onto green.' (AS) (PL) (G) Green #2 'Accentuate Rolls and flank bunkers at rear at points indicated. These bunkers to have 6" lips on greens side. Lower south side of carrying bunker from tee so as to make green surface visible.' (AS) (PL) (G) Hole #3 - 'Green surface to be natural - fill in slight depression at left rear and surface drain to river at this point this green should be 8 to 9000 sq ft.' (PL) (FN) (G) Hole #5 -steep face on bunker left front and sharpen slope on bunker left rear (PL) (B). Surface slightly bumpy, keep lots of character in surface with longer slopes (PL) (G) Green #7 -shallow bunker at right front 6' too far into left of green and 9' to deep. Give at least 6" lip on this bunker to prevent use of putter (PL) (B). Green #8 - Character in surface to be generally accentuated (PL) (G). Bunkers at left front and right side to have steep faces onto green, requiring explosion shot (PL) (B). Pg234 Hole #9 -tee space should be larger Green - develop more character in surface (PL) (G) Eliminate bunker at right rear. Make bunker walls onto green at left side steep. Create maze of sand mounds and grassy islands between 9 and 18 green. Extend bunker at front 25' further north (PL) (B). Hole 10 Bunker at right of drive should be fairly easy to get out of, (long slopes). Carrying bunker at left for long drivers to have steep faces making it necessary to explode (PL) (B) (reinforces strategy) Tee as located, but fairway should be developed in front of carrying bunker necessitation removal of two trees. Make the carrying bunker 'yawning in mouth'. Carry to be 210 yards to far 4L,JJ nd slope of mound (PL) (F). 2 set of carrying bunkers to be steep requiring explosion shot (PL) (B). Green -develop more character in green by raking (PL) (G). Bunker at left front to be make steeper onto green. Rear bunkers to have 9" lip to prevent putting out of them (PL) (B). Green #11 - no bunker at right, but lengthen shape on grass wall (MT) (AS) (G) General -There is a similarity about bunker mounds. Care should be taken to make variety. Peaks can be created here and there to break the lines (AS) In finishing bunkers, those farther from the green should be easiest to get out of; as the green is approached bunkers should become more difficult. The exception to this are the carrying bunkers (PL) (B). PG70-71 General Notes - all pockets for 40 yards out in front of green should be smoothed out. It is unfair to penalize a long drive by faulty (bick?) (PU(F) Notes on front greenside bunker sketch - flash 3 to 5' (lips onto green) (PL) (G) Notes on left side bunker 'include swale in trap' Notes on right side bunker 'flash' greenside edge (AS)(PL)(B) Drawings demonstrating very specific shapes and sizes of greens & Fairways Pg235 DOCUMENT CODE: PAGC DOCUMENT: About Golf Courses. C.1930(byS. Thompson) General Thoughts on Golf Course Design In selecting a golf course site, in addition to its accessibility (FN) (SS) there are other factors, which should be taken into consideration, the most important of which is not its picturesqueness (AS) (SS), although this is an important item. Apart from the general suitability of the terrain for golf the deciding factor should be the chemical and physical character of the soil, as the proper selection will save the club thousands of dollars in construction and maintenance (MT) (SS). It would be almost criminal for a committee to obligate a club to certain land without first being sure as to its suitability. The average green committee changes from year to year and usually has far more enthusiasm than knowledge. Wherever any work is attempted, outside of ordinary maintenance, the experience of most clubs has been that a great amount of money has been squandered. One hundred and thirty acres is sufficient to layout a course on. Less than this should not be used, unless the peculiar character of the land permits, as the course is then apt to be confined and cramped, as well as dangerous (PL) (SS). Anything in excess of 130 acres will permit the architect to work in landscape features. This is an item that cannot be overlooked, for the fascination of golf is not due solely to the science of the shots, but rather to the aesthetic effect of environment (AS) (SS). Lately there has been a reaction, and rightly so, against the artificiality and grotesqueness of certain architecture. Nature must always be the architect's model (AS) (SS). The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling (AS) (G)(B). The development of the natural features and planning the artificial work to conform to them requires a great deal of care and forethought (AS) (SS). In clearing fairways, it is good to have an eye to the beautiful. Often it is possible, by clearing away undesirable and unnecessary trees on the margin of fairways, to open up a view of some attractive picture and frame it with foliage (AS) (V). Water not only makes good mental and actual hazards (PL), but by the picture, which can be created adds greatly to the effect of a course if treated in a natural way (AS) (WF). Streams, ponds, and even open ditches, if properly made, give variety, not only to the play, but to the aspect of the course, and through their steady motion or quiet permanence inspire a feeling of restful calm. Open areas may be demarked by the judicious grouping of trees, which may define the fairways (PL) or act as a screen to hide some undesirable feature (AS) (V). Oftentimes the natural beauty of many a golf course, which the average player assumes was always present, has been created by the skill of the engineer who can see opportunities for beauty in the rough woods, swamps or fields that mean nothing to the unskilled eye (AS) (SS). The absence or presence of the above features, among others, will decide whether continuous play on a course becomes monotonous or otherwise. The actual course should be over 6,000 yards in length, but not much in excess of 6,500, as it then becomes too strenuous (PL) (RT). More length will be necessary on clay soils than on sand or loam ones. Sandy loam is the ideal soil for a golf course; it permits of play earlier in the spring and later in the fall, its natural drainage being better, and worm casts are not so troublesome in sand, because they disintegrate much more readily. The most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the "duffer", while adding to the enjoyment of both (PL) (RT). This is not an easy task, but is by no means an insoluble one. The absence of the cross-bunkers has largely made it possible (PL) (RT). One should always keep in mind that more than 85% of the golfers play 90 or over. These are the men that support the clubs and therefore the course should not be built for the men who play in the 70 class. As soon as a player departs from the straight and narrow path, some penalty should follow. Unless this is Pg236 so, the game loses some of its enjoyment, for it is only by accomplishing what is difficult that gives satisfaction and pleasure (PL) (RT). The most popular courses are by no means the easiest ones an d the wise committee will see that the course is difficult, but not impossible. Every shot in the game should be planned and the holes should be so arranged that each one is different from the following one (PL) (RT). There should be three or four short holes, five is perhaps one too many, as the remaining holes are apt to be unbalanced. They should be interspersed not, however, near the beginning or the end. In the former case they tend to congest the course, while in the latter the player who happens to be down is discriminated against (PL) (RT). There should be six or seven good two-shotters, with alternate tees for the lengthening or shortening of the holes as the ground is hard or soft or the direction of the wind, to preserve their values (PL) (T). The rest should be apportioned between pitch and iron shots for the second. Beware of three-shotters, unless there is some special natural feature demanding them. The starting holes should be comparatively easy, so as not to congest the course; the finishing ones should be long and difficult, for they are often the deciding ones in a match and no one should win a game on an easy hole (PL) (RT). The fewer the blind holes the better (PL) (VS). The bunkers around the greens should always be visible when within striking distance (PL) (VS) (B). A wider margin will naturally be given for a brassie shot than a mashie, but in no case should the bunkers be unfair. One should be able to get out with one shot without Herculean effort (PL) (B). The placing and contouring of greens requires serious consideration, as they must blend into the surrounding terrain (AS) (G). Seventy percent of the putting surface should be available for the placing of the hole (PL) (G). If this is so a putted ball will not increase its momentum after leaving the club. Drainage must at all costs be taken care of (FN) (D). A green should face the shot but should never recede from the player for the very reason that it will be invisible (PL) (G) (VS). A practice green and extra putting green helps to pass away the time while waiting, as well as developing one's game. The first and tenth tee should be at the clubhouse, as on crowded days both nines can be used for the first hour (FN) (RT). As considerable play takes place in the late afternoon, if possible do not face too many holes into the west, because of the irritation of the sun (PL) (RT). The careful placing of bunkers and proper treatment of the rough tends to speed up play by eliminating lost balls (EP) (B) (R). Pg237 APPENDIX D | Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Organizing data by "indigenous categories Appendix D presents a coarse scale of organization that groups coded data according to Indigenous categories (as described in CHAPTER| two, Section 2.5.3.1) CATEGORY: BUNKER (B) SDCB1 'necessary bunkering will be done to produce additional playing character.' (PL) SDCB2 'will be constructed at such locations as golf architecture deems advisable...all bunkers will be sanded or grassed as conditions suggest'. (PL) The slope will be such as to permit of the operation of mowers' (MT) SDMO 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain (AS). The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically (MT). The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of his bunker (PL). All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with course sand found on the property.' (PL) SDNB 'Bunkers will be molded on the sides ... the grass slopes of all bunkers will be quite flat, one and five if possible to permit care in cutting. (MT) The bunkers will be seeded with the same mixture as the rough. (AS) (PL) Bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 6" with coarse water washed sand.' (PL) SDNO 'where they jut into fairways the grades of slopes will be such as to permit ease of cutting.' (MT) SDPEI 'Slopes should be long so as to enable fairway mowers to cut well up on their banks (MT). Bunker walls and slopes will be seeded with same mixture and at same rate as rough (AS) (PL). All bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 8" with good course water-washed sand (PL).' RCAP 'bunker at left side of fairway opposite green approach' (PL) RFNP 'Do not cut the bunkers with a straight edge. Runners of grass or points of sod in the bunkers tend to improve their appearance and take away artificiality.' (AS) RJNP 'the bunker in the centre of this fairway has always been unfair since the left rout was cut off. This bunker should now be removed and another built at the left side of the fairway, 200 to 275 mark. (PL) RPE11 '...the sand areas of the bunkers in some instances can be reduced but care must be taken to see the sand is well flashed up on the slopes so as to make the bunker stand out' (AS) RPEI2 'the bunkers surrounding this green should be well flashed up to bring the surface of the green into relief. As a matter of fact, on most of the bunkers around the course the grass has been allowed to encroach on the sand area so that they are no longer resemble what they originally were.' (AS) 'the bunkers on this hole should be flashed with sand. They are not in good condition and make the hole look ragged' (AS) PAGC The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling (AS) (G). The bunkers around the greens should always be visible when within striking distance (PL) (VS) 'A wider margin will naturally be given for a brassie shot than a mashie, but in no case should the bunkers be unfair. One should be able to get out with one shot without Herculean effort (PL) The careful placing of bunkers and proper treatment of the rough tends to speed up piay by eliminating lost balls (EP) (R) ASFN 'steep face on bunker left front and sharpen slope on bunker left rear (PL) Pg238 'shallow bunker at right front 6' too far into left of green and 9' to deep. Give at least 6" lip on this bunker to prevent use of putter' (PL) 'Bunkers at left front and right side to have steep faces onto green, requiring explosion shot' (PL) 'Eliminate bunker at right rear. Make bunker walls onto green at left side steep. Create maze of sand mounds and grassy islands between 9 and 18 green. Extend bunker at front 25' further north (PL) 'Bunker at right of drive should be fairly easy to get out of, (long slopes). Carrying bunker at left for long drivers to have steep faces making it necessary to explode' (PL) '2nd set of carrying bunkers to be steep requiring explosion shot' (PL) 'Bunker at left front to be make steeper onto green. Rear bunkers to have 9" lip to prevent putting out of them' (PL) There is a similarity about bunker mounds. Care should be taken to make variety. Peaks can be created here and there to break the lines (AS). In finishing bunkers, those farther from the green should be easiest to get out of; as the green is approached bunkers should become more difficult. The exception to this are the carrying bunkers' (PL) Notes on left side bunker 'include swale in trap' Notes on right side bunker 'flash' greenside edge (AS) (PL) CATEGORY: DRAINAGE (D) PAGC Drainage must at all costs be taken care of (FN) CATEGORY: FAIRWAY (F) SDCB1 'fairway clearing will vary from 150 feet to 250 feet depending upon the length and characteristics of the hole.' (PL) SDCB2 'will average 65 yards in width' (PL) SDMO 'the fairways at the 200 yard mark will average 65 yards width' (PL) SDNB 'average 65 yards in width'. (PL) SDNO will average 60 yards in width' (PL) SDPEI 'will average 65 yards in width.' (PL) RCAP 'remove boulder outcropping on this fairway. This applies to all boulders throughout the course' (AS) (MT) (PL) 'create flat bench 75' back from stream' (PL) RJNP The slope at the end of the drive has always been annoying and unfair to the average golfer. It should be lengthened (PL) 'at the pass, 200 to 290 yd mark, lower the right side of fairway and put fill obtained at left side; this to create a flat playing area at this point' (PL) ASFN Tee as located, but fairway should be developed in front of carrying bunker necessitation removal of two trees. Make the carrying bunker 'yawning in mouth'. Carry to be 210 yards to far slope of mound' (PL). 'all pockets for 40 yards out in front of green should be smoothed out. It is unfair to penalize a long drive by faulty (bick?)' (PL) Pg239 CATEGORY: GREEN (G) SDCB1 'fittingly contoured to present playing variety. They will have an average playing surface of approximately 6000 sq ft' (PL) SDCB2 'will be built at the locations as shown on plan, except than topographical features might suggest slight variations in this respect.' (PL) (MT) 'Greens will average 6,000 square feet of putting surface. Total putting area for the nine holes will not be less than 54,000 square feet, minimum size for any one green not to be lower than 4,500 square feet.' (PL) 'slope at back and sides of green will be shaped to tie gracefully with the surrounding contours and general setting.' (AS) 'slopes will be long to permit of ease in mowing' (MT) SDMO 'the putting surfaces of the greens will vary between 4000-7000 sq ft' (PL) SDNB The greens will average 5,000 sq ft of putting surface depending on the length of the shot. For shape see individual sketches.' (PL) SDNO They will average 6,000 sq ft of putting surface (PL). Slopes at back and sides will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours (AS). SDPEI will average 6000 square feet of putting surface (PL). Slope at back and sides of greens will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours, and setting (AS). RCAP 'observe sun conditions and report whether more trees than those already blazed have to be removed around this green to admit afternoon sun.' (MT) RJNP 'the green has not enough putting surface and is obscured by mound at left front. This mound should be flattened and the putting surface enlarged 1000 sq ft by building up to the right and to the rear.' (PL) 'build a new green at this hole. This could really be an outstanding hole with such a background as Pyramid. The green surface is obscured from the end of the drive. The green should be raised on an average of 3' and the back built up, taking pyramid mountain as a model for the molding.' (AS) (PL) 'the Bad Baby is an unfair hole for the average golfer, but presents few difficulties to the crack. It is proposed to enlarge the left hand side of this green and the bunkers at this point and to put a pot trap at the right front. The immediate approach to the green at the right will be made easier for those adept at the sneak and run pitch' (PL) 'this is a plain looking hole, especially at the mound just before the green. The charm of this hole is the blind green surface. A golfer walks over the last rise expectantly to see what treatment the obscure rolls have given his ball. This feature must be left In the hole... (AS) It is respectfully suggested that this hole would be greatly improves if a pass were created at the centre of the fairway, the 500 yard mark and the dirt mounded at either side. This would make the top of the flag and the heads of the players visible, it would also improve the appearance of the hole and take away some of the danger.' (PL)... PAGC The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling (AS) (B). The placing and contouring of greens requires serious consideration, as they must blend into the surrounding terrain (AS). Seventy percent of the putting surface should be available for the placing of the hole (PL) 'A green should face the shot but should never recede from the player for the very reason that it will be invisible (PL) (VS) Pg240 CASH IDEAL LENGTH FOR 18 HOLE GOLF COURSE Showing area of greens in relation to length of hole Hole# Length Par Putting surface area (Sq ft) 5 145 3 4000 12 170 3 5000 15 195 3 6000 8 220 3 7000 17 245 3 8000 1 340 4 4500 10 355 4 5000 16 370 4 5500 4 385 4 6000 2 400 4 6500 7 415 4 7000 9 430 4 7500 13 445 4 8000 3 460 5 4000 18 475 5 5000 11 490 5 6000 6 530 5 7000 14 590 5 8000 6600 72 110,000 'or an average of approximately 6000 sq ft per green' (FN) (PL) ASFN 'Create mound in centre and develop terrace at right side about one foot higher than left side and sharpen mound at right rear. Eliminate long bunker at left side (as originally planned) make wall of bunker at left front steeper onto green.' (AS) (PL) 'Accentuate Rolls and flank bunkers at rear at points indicated. These bunkers to have 6" lips on greens side. Lower south side of carrying bunker from tee so as to make green surface visible.' (AS) (PL) 'Green surface to be natural - fill in slight depression at left rear and surface drain to river at this point this green should be 8 to 9000 sq ft.' (PL) (FN) 'Surface slightly bumpy, keep lots of character in surface with longer slopes' (PL) 'Character in surface to be generally accentuated' (PL) 'develop more character in surface' (PL) 'develop more character in green by raking' (PL), 'no bunker at right, but lengthen shape on grass wall' (MT) (AS) Notes on front greenside bunker sketch -flash 3 to 5' (lips onto green) (PL) CATEGORY: LANDSCAPE (L) SDCBl 'the course, when completed, will be of championship caliber, and will be of such pleasing landscape throughout as to mark it as being a course of distinction.' (AS) SDNO 'Planting of flowering shrubs as well as trees around tees will, in a few years, make a very attractive display.' (AS) RJNP 'the starting and finishing arrangements are not good at jasper. The golfer should be directed on To the first tee and off the eighteenth green. This can be done by having directive planting (AS)' 'Suitable shrub planting would be made around the clubhouse, first tee, practice green and practice tee. What is not plain would become an attractive landscape features (AS)' Pg241 BCCAP 'with regards to the landscape of the course, I deem this of utmost importance. When I visited the property, I found the gardener, who I think is a very competent man, planting shrubbery more or less promiscuously at various points around the course. I tried to guide him, but landscape is not my fort (think he meant forte), and I gave him the meager notes attached merely to direct him until such time as you go out. You will note we suggest that on your next trip you give your ideas on golf course plantings for I feel I have gone further than I had wished to' (AS) CATEGORY: PATHS & FURNISHINGS (P) SDCB2 (Shelter) 'will be of attractive log construction of rustic type' (AS) 'all required paths leading from green to tees on the next fairway, will be cut out and leveled without introducing the type of path formality that too often fails to blend with existing scenic conditions.' (AS) 'and will be so graded as to make it harmonize with the landscape' (AS) 'where advisable, steps built of native timber will be provided to service the tees.' (AS) (Footbridge) 'will be built of native timber* (AS) SDMO 'Paths will be cleared between tees and greens and treated with a coarse sand into which will be mixed a certain amount of clay to give solidity. (FN) The paths will not be cut straight, but will meander through the woods. (AS) SDNO 'four foot wide path will be built on easy grades from greens to tees' (FN) CATEGORY: ROUGH (R) SDCB2 'Will extend, unless otherwise specified, for 75 yards in front of the back tees and for 10 yards on either side of the fairway and around greens.' (PL) (AS) (MT) SDMO 'rough with the exception of the first hole, will extend 75 yards in front of the tees and for 10 yards on each side of the fairway and around the back of the green' (PL) SDNB 'All poplars, shrubs and alders will be cut out of the edge of the rough on the edge of the clearing and the spruce, birch, maple mountain ash and feature trees brought into relief.' (AS) (Fairway) 'will start 75 yards in front of the back tees (PL) SDNO 'Fairways will commence 75 yards in front of back tees' (PL) 'the area lying 75 yards in front of tees and 10 yards on either side of fairways and around greens' (PL) SDPEI 'will extend for 75 yards in front of back tee and for 10 yards on either side of the fairways and around greens.' (PL) PAGC The careful placing of bunkers and proper treatment of the rough tends to speed up play by eliminating lost balls (EP) (B) CATEGORY: ROUTING (RT) SDCBl 'the course will measure approximately 6100 yards from the forward tees and 6600 yards from the long tees'(PL) CASH 'Easy start, Difficult Finish' (PL) -first hole should be a par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion (PL) - short and long and easy and hard holes should all be fairly evenly distributed throughout the round (PL) Pg242 HOLE LENGTH PAR HANDICAP HOLE LENGTH PAR HANDICAP 1 340 4 16 10 355 4 13 2 400 4 8 11 490 5 9 3 460 5 14 12 170 3 17 4 385 4 12 13 445 4 1 5 145 3 18 14 590 5 5 6 530 5 2 15 195 3 15 7 415 4 6 16 370 4 3 8 220 3 10 17 245 3 7 9 430 4 4 18 475 5 11 OUT 3325 36 IN 3335 36 OUT 3325 36 TOTAL 6600 72 'holes at which strokes are given, should be most difficult holes to score on, having regard to prevailing winds, uphill grades and other local conditions and not based solely on length' (PL) 'Strokes should be equally distributed between nines. The first stroke should be given on the second nine and the second stroke not earlier than the third or fourth hole of the first nine.' (PL) PAGC 'course should be over 6,000 yards in length, but not much in excess of 6,500, as it then becomes too strenuous' (PL) The most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the "duffer", while adding to the enjoyment of both... The absence of the cross- bunkers has largely made it possible' (PL) 'As soon as a player departs from the straight and narrow path, some penalty should follow. Unless this is so, the game loses some of its enjoyment, for it is only by accomplishing what is difficult that gives satisfaction and pleasure' (PL) 'Every shot in the game should be planned and the holes should be so arranged that each one is different from the following one' (PL) There should be three or four short holes, five is perhaps one too many, as the remaining holes are apt to be unbalanced. They should be interspersed not, however, near the beginning or the end. In the former case they tend to congest the course, while in the latter the player who happens to be down is discriminated against (PL). The rest should be apportioned between pitch and iron shots for the second. Beware of three- shotters, unless there is some special natural feature demanding them. The starting holes should be comparatively easy, so as not to congest the course; the finishing ones should be long and difficult, for they are often the deciding ones in a match and no one should win a game on an easy hole'(PL) The first and tenth tee should be at the clubhouse, as on crowded days both nines can be used for the first hour (FN). As considerable play takes place in the late afternoon, if possible do not face too many holes into the west, because of the irritation of the sun (PL) CATEGORY: SHAPING (SH) SDCBl 'the knolls and depressions will be excavated and filled and top dressed to create an easily mowable surface.' (MT) SDCB2 'When topsoil for greens and tees is borrowed from locations outside the golf course, the ground from where the borrowing takes place should be leveled off, and if necessary, drainage provided to prevent the lodging of water. (FN) 'Care should also be taken that the beauty of the land is not marred' (AS) SDNB 'all sharp undulations will be taken out of fairways so that the fairway mowers can cut the area without scalping' (MT) Pg243 RPEI2 'this hole has a little too much character in the surface. It seems to have settled badly' (PL) CATEGORY: SITE SELECTION 81 DESIGN (SS) RMGC 'the area, while extensive enough, is low lying and flat, and the soil shows only average fertility. The landscape, other than the beach, is not particularly attractive. If a golf course were constructed here the character would have to be built in artificially, which would be costly and not very interesting to play. The area with its fine beach and buildings is suitable for a community, but it lacks the natural character so necessary to a good golf course.' (SS) 'while sufficient contiguous land could be acquired, it is not the type most suitable for golf. The panorama is grand but the area is windblown. It is felt considerable artificial character would have to be added to make a golf course, and this coupled with the cost, makes this site undesirable.' (SS) This site, some 300 acres, extends from a sand dune ridge fronting the ocean, back into a wooded farmland. It is traversed by two brooks, has a number of springs and a fresh water lake of approximately 30 acres. The soil for the most part is in good till. The contour and variety of the terrain is ideal for the development of a fine golf course at a comparatively small cost. This coupled with the fact that the community round about is pastorally beautiful and has been the subject of a noted 'best seller', should prove of interest to tourists. I have therefore no hesitation in recommending the establishment of the golf course on the property known as Green Gables.' (SS) This area provides craggy cliff land, sandy shore, wooded valley land traversed by a river. I know of no place on the whole Atlantic Sea Board where such a variety of terrain can be found in so limited an area. PAGC In selecting a golf course site, in addition to its accessibility (FN) there are other factors, which should be taken into consideration, the most important of which is not its picturesqueness (AS), although this is an important item. Apart from the general suitability of the terrain for golf the deciding factor should be the chemical and physical character of the soil, as the proper selection will save the club thousands of dollars in construction and maintenance (MT). One hundred and thirty acres is sufficient to layout a course on. Less than this should not be used, unless the peculiar character of the land permits, as the course is then apt to be confined and cramped, as well as dangerous (PL). Anything in excess of 130 acres will permit the architect to work in landscape features. This is an item that cannot be overlooked, for the fascination of golf is not due solely to the science of the shots, but rather to the aesthetic effect of environment (AS). Lately there has been a reaction, and rightly so, against the artificiality and grotesqueness of certain architecture. Nature must always be the architect's model (AS). The development of the natural features and planning the artificial work to conform to them requires a great deal of care and forethought' (AS) 'Oftentimes the natural beauty of many a golf course, which the average player assumes was always present, has been created by the skill of the engineer who can see opportunities for beauty in the rough woods, swamps or fields that mean nothing to the unskilled eye (AS) CATEGORY: TEES (T) SDCBl 'there will be 1800 sq ft of teeing surface to each hole divided into one, two or three areas." (PL) SDCB2 'Will average 1800 square ft of teeing surface to each hole, which may be divided into two areas...level to be determined at the discretion of the architect' (PL) 'where tees are built up to improve visibility...' (PL) (VS) Pg244 'side slopes (tees) will conform to a 2:1 slope as a minimum except where built on precipitous ledges' (M) SDMO 'two tees to each hole located wherever possible, at different angles so as to give variety' (PL) 'at least 2000 sq ft of teeing area for each hole' (FN) 'slopes of the sides of the tees will be drawn out so that they can be cut mechanically' (MT) 'tees will be graded flat on the site' (PL) 'Where necessary to improve visibility they will be raised.' (PL) SDNB 'tees will have a playing surface of 1500 to 2000 Sq ft depending on the length of the hole (FN). They will be divided into two areas, a back and a forward tee (PL). The slope of the sides of the tees where practicable will be a one to five grade so as to permit ease of cutting (MT).' SDNO 'tees will average 3000 square feet of teeing space to each hole, divided into two playing areas (FN). Tees on the flat will be built up sufficiently to provide good drainage only (FN)...where however the forward tee is in the line of play from the back tee, it will be kept lower...' (PL) SDPEI Average 1800 sq ft per hole 'divided into two areas'. (FN) Tees sometimes built up to improve visibility. (PL) Tees located in the sand dunes 'cribbed in creosoted logs, trees or old beams'. (AS) RJNP There would be three levels to the first tee, one on the raised portion, one on a level with the existing tee and a third one forward on the level of the fairway (PL).' 'round front of lower tee when reseeding' (AS) 'the present tee is too small and there is no way of extending it to the rear. We suggest a peninsula be built out into the lake 20 yards to the left and rear of the existing tee. This peninsula should have a surface of 3000 sq ft (FN) . it will make an attractive landscape feature and be much appreciated by those other than golfers (AS). The carry from this tee will be no longer than the carry from the present tee for it is proposed to build the shore out slightly to shorten the carry. It will really be easier to play from than the old tee, for instead of playing at an angle across the water to the fairway, the shot from the proposed tee to the fairway will be square on (PL). RPEI2 'a new ladies tee should be built at the level of the fairway far side of the bridge which crosses the stream (PL) wherever tees are built on the course, make sure if possible to have the slopes long as this makes for ease in maintenance.' (MT) PAGC There should be six or seven good two-shotters, with alternate tees for the lengthening or shortening of the holes as the ground is hard or soft or the direction of the wind, to preserve their values'(PL) CATEGORY: VEGETATION (V) SDCBl 'the sides and rough bordering the fairways will be cleared of all underbrush and loose debris for a distance of 30 feet back, so as to present a neat attractive appearance.' (AS) SDCB2 'Care will betaken not to damage any tree growth around existing clearings. The branches will be left feathered down to the ground. There will be the most aesthetic treatment possible of all tree life.' (AS) SDNO '...rather than rows of trees delineating fairways, all plantings should be done in groups or clumps as indicated on plan.' (AS) SDPEI 'care must be taken not to trim trees around existing clearings. The branches must be left feathered down to the ground' (AS) RCAP 'underbrush and remove windfalls, cut stumps close to ground for 30' both sides of fairway.' (AS) 'unless clearing is done thoroughly; by this I mean removal of windfall and stumps, it is much better to leave the bush in its natural state' (AS) 'removing all logs and windfalls, leaving the young growth, unless this can be done properly, leave it in the raw state. (AS) Pg245 'improve area left rear of green (this area is a piece of scabby clearing and it would have looked better in its natural state)... plant more extensively behind green' (AS) RPEI2 'there should be a little clearing done at the left front of #16 tee. The brush between the bay of the lake and the tee has grown up at this point and makes the hole look too formidable.' (PL) PAGC 'In clearing fairways, it is good to have an eye to the beautiful. Often it is possible, by clearing away undesirable and unnecessary trees on the margin of fairways, to open up a view of some attractive picture and frame it with foliage (AS) 'Open areas may be demarked by the judicious grouping of trees, which may define the fairways (PL) or act as a screen to hide some undesirable feature (AS). CATEGORY: VISIBILITY (VS) SDCB2 'where tees are built up to improve visibility...' (PL) PAGC The fewer the blind holes the better' (PL) The bunkers around the greens should always be visible when within striking distance' (PL) 'A green should face the shot but should never recede from the player for the very reason that it will be invisible (PL) (G) CATEGORY: WATER FEATURES (WF) SDPEI Throughout the property will be allowed to take their natural course but where there is likelihood of erosion, banks will be straightened and slopes lengthened. (AS) RCAP 'pond must be scaled to make at least 50% of pond visible from the back tee' (AS) PAGC Water not only makes good mental and actual hazards (PL), but by the picture, which can be created adds greatly to the effect of a course if treated in a natural way* (AS). Pg246 APPENDIX EI Distilling Thompson's Design Principles: Evaluating data and interpreting design principles In appendix E, each thought from every quote was analyzed and then grouped by "analyst-constructed" sub-category within their "indigenous" category. Thompson's principles of design were then interpreted from patterns within each sub-category (as described in CHAPTER | two, Section 2.5.3.2) CATEGORY: Bunkers BUNKERS (B): AESTHETICS SDMO 'Bunker traps and mounds will be constructed so as to tie gracefully with the surrounding terrain' PAGC The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling ASFN 'There is a similarity about bunker mounds. Care should be taken to make variety Peaks can be created here and there to break the lines'. SDNB The bunkers will be seeded with the same mixture as the rough' SDPEI 'Bunker walls and slopes will be seeded with same mixture and at same rate as rough'. RFNP 'Do not cut the bunkers with a straight edge Runners of grass or points of sod in the bunkers tend to improve their appearance and take away artificiality' RPEI1 ' .the sand areas of the bunkers in some instances can be reduced but care must be taken to see the sand is well flashed up on the slopes so as to make the bunker stand out' RPEI2 'the bunkers surrounding this green should be well flashed up to bring the surface of the green into relief. As a matter of fact, on most of the bunkers around the course the grass has been allowed to encroach on the sand area so that they are no longer resemble what they originally were.' RPEI2 'the bunkers on this hole should be flashed with sand. They are not in good condition and make the hole look ragged' ASFN Notes on right side bunker 'flash' greenside edge ASFN Notes on front greenside bunker sketch - 'flash 3 to 5" (lips onto green) • Horizon lines should be rolling and varied and should tie 'gracefully' into surrounding terrain • Bunker edges should be made to look as natural as possible • Flash sand up slopes of bunkers to make them visible BUNKERS (B): PLAYABILITY FAIRWAY BUNKER STRATEGY SDCBl 'necessary bunkering will be done to produce additional playing character.' PAGC The most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the "duffer", while adding to the enjoyment of both... The absence of the cross- bunkers has largely made it possible' RCAP 'bunker at left side of fairway opposite green approach' RJNP 'the bunker in the centre of this fairway has always been unfair since the left route was cut off. This bunker should now be removed and another built at the left side of the fairway, 200 to 275 mark Pg247 RJNP 'the Bad Baby is an unfair hole for the average golfer, but presents few difficulties to the crack It is proposed to enlarge the left hand side of this green and the bunkers at this point and to put a pot trap at the right front The immediate approach to the green at the right will be made easier for those adept at the sneak and run pitch' FAIRWAY BUNKER CHARACTER PAGC 'A wider margin will naturally be given for a brassie shot than a mashie, but in no case should the bunkers be unfair One should be able to get out with one shot without Herculean effort' ASFN 'Bunker at right of drive should be fairly easy to get out of, (long slopes) Carrying bunker at left for long drivers to have steep faces making it necessary to explode' ASFN '2nd set of carrying bunkers to be steep requiring explosion shot' ASFN 'In finishing bunkers, those further from the green should be easiest to get out of, as the green is approached bunkers should become more difficult The exception to this are the carrying bunkers' • Bunkering should be placed to create strategy and character of a hole, however a route should be left accessible for the lesser player • Bunkers farthest from the green should allow the easiest recovery; bunkers should become progressively more challenging the closer they are positioned to the green • 'Carry bunkers' placed strategically through the fairway are the exception and should steep faced requiring explosive recovery shots GREEN SIDE BUNKERS SDMO The bunkers around the greens will have steep slopes up to the greens so that golfers will not be able to putt out of this bunker. PAGC The bunkers around the greens should always be visible when within striking distance' ASFN 'steep face on bunker left front and sharpen slope on bunker left rear" ASFN 'shallow bunker at right front 6'too far into left of green and 9'to deep Give at least 6" lip on this bunker to prevent use of putter'. ASFN 'Bunkers at left front and right side to have steep faces onto green, requiring explosion shot' ASFN 'Eliminate bunker at right rear Make bunker walls onto green at left side steep. Create maze of sand mounds and grassy islands between 9 and 18 green. Extend bunker at front 25' further north' ASFN 'Bunker at left front to be make steeper onto green. Rear bunkers to have 9" lip to prevent putting out of them' • Greenside bunkers should be visible on approach • Greenside bunkers can vary in depth and character, however one should never be able to putt from them BUNKER SAND SDMO All bunkers throughout the course will be sanded to a depth of 6" with course sand found on the property' SDNB 'Bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 6" with coarse water washed sand ' SDPEI 'All bunkers will be sanded to a depth of 8" with good course water-washed sand.' • Bunkers should be sanded at a 6 to 8" depth BUNKERS (B): MAINTENANCE SDCB2 The slope will be such as to permit of the operation of mowers' SDMO The back slopes of these bunkers will be long so that they can be cut mechanically* Pg248 SDNB 'Bunkers will be molded on the sides ..the grass slopes of all bunkers will be quite flat, one and five if possible to permit care in cutting' SDNO 'where they jut into fairways the grades of slopes will be such as to permit ease of cutting' SDPEI 'Slopes should be long so as to enable fairway mowers to cut well up on their banks' Slopes of fairway and greenside bunkers should be long and gentle to permit mechanical mowing. BUNKERS (B): EXPERIENCE OF PLACE PAGC The careful placing of bunkers and proper treatment of the rough tends to speed up play by eliminating lost balls' BUNKER DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Horizon lines should be long, rolling and varied and should tie 'gracefully* into surrounding terrain • Bunker edges should be made to look as natural as possible • Bunkers should be visible • Bunkering should be placed to create strategy and character of a hole, however a route should be left accessible for the lesser player • Bunkers farthest from the green should allow the easiest recovery; bunkers should become progressively more challenging the closer they are positioned to the green • 'Carry bunkers' placed strategically through the fairway to turn a hole are the exception and should steep faced requiring explosive recovery shots • Greenside bunkers can vary in depth and character, however one should never be able to putt from them • Bunkers should be sanded at a 6 to 8" depth • Slopes of fairway and greenside bunkers should be long and gentle to permit mechanical mowing. CATEGORY: Drainage DRAINAGE (D): FUNCTION PAGC 'Drainage must at all costs be taken care of SDCB2 'When topsoil for greens and tees is borrowed from locations outside the golf course, the ground from where the borrowing takes place should be leveled off, and if necessary, drainage provided to prevent the lodging of water.' • Drainage must always be considered CATEGORY: Fairways FAIRWAY (F): PLAYABILITY SDCBl 'fairway clearing will vary from 150 feet to 250 feet depending upon the length and characteristics of the hole.' SDCB2 'will average 65 yards in width' SDMO 'the fairways at the 200 yard mark will average 65 yards width' SDNB 'average 65 yards in width'. SDNO 'will average 60 yards in width' SDPEI 'will average 65 yards in width.' Pg249 RCAP 'create flat bench 75' back from stream' 'remove boulder outcropping on this fairway This applies to all boulders throughout the course' RJNP 'The slope at the end of the drive has always been annoying and unfair to the average golfer It should be lengthened' 'at the pass, 200 to 290 yd mark, lower the right side of fairway and put fill obtained at left side, this to create a flat playing area at this point' ASFN 'Tee as located, but fairway should be developed in front of carrying bunker necessitation removal of two trees Make the carrying bunker'yawning in mouth' Carry to be 210 yards to far slope of mound' 'all pockets for 40 yards out in front of green should be smoothed out It is unfair to penalize a long drive by faulty (bick?)' SDCBl 'the knolls and depressions will be excavated and filled and top dressed to create an easily mowable surface.' SDNB 'all sharp undulations will be taken out of fairways so that the fairway mowers can cut the area without scalping' RPEI2 'this hole has a little too much character in the surface It seems to have settled badly' PAGC 'As soon as a player departs from the straight and narrow path, some penalty should follow Unless this is so, the game loses some of its enjoyment, for it is only by accomplishing what is difficult that gives satisfaction and pleasure' FAIRWAY DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Fairway should average 60-65 yards width • Level/ smooth surface contours in areas of the fairway that make it more fair for the average player or that reward an optimal shot • Remove natural elements that impede strategy or present a hazard to golfers • A penalty should find those who leave the straight and narrow path CATEGORY: Greens GREENS (G): AESTHETICS SDCB2 'slope at back and sides of green will be shaped to tie gracefully with the surrounding contours and general setting' SDNO 'Slopes at back and sides will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours' SDPEI 'Slope at back and sides of greens will be shaped to tie in gracefully with the surrounding contours, and setting' PAGC The lines of bunkers and greens must not be sharp or harsh, but easy and rolling' The placing and contouring of greens requires serious consideration, as they must blend into the surrounding terrain' ASFN 'no bunker at right, but lengthen shape on grass wall' RJNP 'build a new green at this hole. This could really be an outstanding hole with such a background as Pyramid The green surface is obscured from the end of the drive The green should be raised on an average of 3' and the back built up, taking pyramid mountain as a model for the molding' ASFN 'Accentuate rolls and flank bunkers at rear at points indicated. These bunkers to have 6" lips on greens side Lower south side of carrying bunker from tee so as to make green surface visible.' PAGC 'should never recede from the player for the very reason that it will be invisible' Pg250 RJNP 'this is a plain looking hole, especially at the mound just before the green The charm of this hole is the blind green surface A golfer walks over the last rise expectantly to see what treatment the obscure rolls have given his ball This feature must be left in the hole' RJNP 'It is respectfully suggested that this hole would be greatly improves if a pass were created at the centre of the fairway, the 500 yard mark and the dirt mounded at either side This would make the top of the flag and the heads of the players visible, it would also improve the appearance of the hole and take away some of the danger.' • Contour of the green surface and surrounds must tie gracefully with surrounding contours and setting • Mounding in the green complex can sometimes reflective the form and character of it surrounding landscape • In general green surfaces should be visible, however, some blind green-sites add to the charm of a hole. Efforts should be made to ensure that blind shots are safe for the players. GREENS (G): PLAYABILITY SDCBl 'fittingly contoured to present playing variety PAGC Seventy percent of the putting surface should be available for the placing of the hole ASFN 'Surface slightly bumpy, keep lots of character in surface with longer slopes' ASFN 'Character in surface to be generally accentuated' ASFN 'develop more character in surface' ASFN 'develop more character in green by raking' ASFN 'Create mound in centre and develop terrace at right side about one foot higher than left side and sharpen mound at right rear' PAGC 'A green should face the shot SDCBl They will have an average playing surface of approximately 6000 sq ft' SDCB2 'Greens will average 6,000 square feet of putting surface Total putting area for the nine holes will not be less than 54,000 square feet, minimum size for any one green not to be lower than 4,500 square feet' SDMO 'the putting surfaces of the greens will vary between 4000-7000 sq ft' SDNB The greens will average 5,000 sq ft of putting surface depending on the length of the shot For shape see individual sketches' SDNO They will average 6,000 sq ft of putting surface' SDPEI 'will average 6000 square feet of putting surface' CASH 'or an average of approximately 6000 sq ft per green' ASFN 'Green surface to be natural - fill in slight depression at left rear and surface drain to river at this point this green should be 8 to 9000 sq ft' Pg251 CASH Ideal length for 18 hole golf course showing area of greens in relation to length of hole Hole# Length Par Putting surface area (Sq ft) 5 145 3 4000 12 170 3 5000 15 195 3 6000 8 220 3 7000 17 245 3 8000 1 340 4 4500 10 355 4 5000 16 370 4 5500 4 385 4 6000 2 400 4 6500 7 415 4 7000 9 430 4 7500 13 445 4 8000 3 460 5 4000 18 475 5 5000 11 490 5 6000 6 530 5 7000 14 590 5 8000 6600 72 110,000 SDCB2 'will be built at the locations as shown on plan, except than topographical features might suggest slight variations in this respect.' RJNP 'the green has not enough putting surface and is obscured by mound at left front. This mound should be flattened and the putting surface enlarged 1000 sq ft by building up to the right and to the rear.' • Greens should exhibit variety and character in the surfaces contours and should be at least 70% pinnable • Courses should average 6,000 sq ft per green, totaling 110,000 sq ft of putting surface • Individual green sizes will vary according to the length of the approach shot. • Greens should be orientation to face the shot GREENS (G): MAINTENANCE SDCB2 'slopes will be long to permit of ease in mowing' RCAP 'observe sun conditions and report whether more trees than those already blazed have to be removed around this green to admit afternoon sun.' ASFN 'no bunker at right, but lengthen shape on grass wall' • Long slopes to permit ease of mowing • Ensure adequate afternoon sun on greens GREEN DESIGN PRINCIPLES • Contours of the green surface and surrounds should be long and must tie gracefully with surrounding contours and setting • Mounding in the green complex can sometimes reflective the form and character of it surrounding landscape • In general green surfaces should be visible (sloped back to front), however, some blind green- sites add to the charm of a hole. Efforts should be made to ensure that blind shots are safe for the players. Pg252 • Greens should exhibit variety and character in the surfaces contours and should be at least 70% pinnable • Courses should average 6,000 sq ft per green, totaling 110,000 sq ft of putting surface. Individual green sizes will vary according to the length of the approach shot. • Greens should be orientation to face the shot • Long slopes to permit ease of mowing • Ensure adequate afternoon sun on greens CATEGORY: Landscape LANDSCAPE (L): AESTHETICS SDCBl 'the course, when completed, will be of championship caliber, and will be of such pleasing landscape throughout as to mark it as being a course of distinction.' SDNO 'Planting of flowering shrubs as well as trees around tees will, in a few years, make a very attractive display.' RJNP 'the starting and finishing arrangements are not good at jasper. The golfer should be directed on To the first tee and off the eighteenth green. This can be done by having directive planting' RJNP 'Suitable shrub planting would be made around the clubhouse, first tee, practice green and practice tee What is not plain would become an attractive landscape features' LANDSCAPE DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Landscaping should be used to enhance the aesthetic quality of key course elements such as the clubhouse, first tee, final green and practice tee and green CATEGORY: Paths & Furnishings PATHS & FURNISHINGS (P): AESTHETICS SDCB2 (Shelter) 'will be of attractive log construction of rustic type' 'all required paths leading from green to tees on the next fairway, will be cut out and leveled without introducing the type of path formality that too often fails to blend with existing scenic conditions.' 'and will be so graded as to make it harmonize with the landscape' 'where advisable, steps built of native timber will be provided to service the tees.' (Footbridge) 'will be built of native timber' SDMO The paths will not be cut straight, but will meander through the woods.' PATHS & FURNISHINGS (P): FUNCTION SDMO 'Paths will be cleared between tees and greens and treated with a coarse sand into which will be mixed a certain amount of clay to give solidity-' SDNO 'four foot wide path will be built on easy grades from greens to tees' PATH & FURNISHING DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Site furnishings to exhibit a natural aesthetic • Paths from green to tee should meander and lack formality Pg253 CATEGORY: Other OTHER (O): AESTHETICS SDCB2 'Care should also betaken that the beauty of the land is not marred' • The beauty of the landscape should always be protected CATEGORY: Rough ROUGH (R): PLAYABILITY SDCB2 'Will extend, unless otherwise specified, for 75 yards in front of the back tees and for 10 yards on either side of the fairway and around greens ' SDMO 'rough with the exception of the first hole, will extend 75 yards in front of the tees and for 10 yards on each side of the fairway and around the back of the green' SDNB (Fairway) 'will start 75 yards in front of the back tees' SDNO 'Fairways will commence 75 yards in front of back tees' 'the area lying 75 yards in front of tees and 10 yards on either side of fairways and around greens' SDPEI 'will extend for 75 yards in front of back tee and for 10 yards on either side of the fairways and around greens.' ROUGH (R): EXPERIENCE OF PUCE PAGC The careful placing of bunkers and proper treatment of the rough tends to speed up play by eliminating lost balls' ROUGH DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Rough to extend for 75 yards in front of the back tee and 10 yards to the sides of fairways and around greens. CATEGORY: Routing ROUTING (RT): FUNCTION PAGC 'The first and tenth tee should be at the clubhouse, as on crowded days both nines can be used for the first hour" ROUTING (RT): PLAYABILITY SDCBl 'the course will measure approximately 6100 yards from the forward tees and 6600 yards from the long tees' PAGC 'course should be over 6,000 yards in length, but not much in excess of 6,500, as it then becomes too strenuous' CASH 'Easy start' CASH first hole should be a par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion PAGC The starting holes should be comparatively easy, so as not to congest the course, CASH short and long and easy and hard holes should all be fairly evenly distributed throughout the round Pg254 HOLE LENGTH PA HANDICA HOLE LENGTH PAR HANDICAP R P 1 340 4 16 10 355 4 13 2 400 4 8 11 490 5 9 3 460 5 14 12 170 3 17 4 385 4 12 13 445 4 1 5 145 3 18 14 590 5 5 6 530 5 2 15 195 3 15 7 415 4 6 16 370 4 3 8 220 3 10 17 245 3 7 9 430 4 4 18 475 5 11 OUT 3325 36 IN 3335 36 OUT 3325 36 TOTAL 6600 72 CASH 'Strokes should be equally distributed between nines The first stroke should be given on the second nine and the second stroke not earlier than the third or fourth hole of the first nine ' PAGC 'There should be three or four short holes, five is perhaps one too many, as the remaining holes are apt to be unbalanced. They should be interspersed not, however, near the beginning or the end In the former case they tend to congest the course, while in the latter the player who happens to be down is discriminated against' PAGC 'The rest should be apportioned between pitch and iron shots for the second Beware of three- shotters, unless there is some special natural feature demanding them CASH 'holes at which strokes are given, should be most difficult holes to score on, having regard to prevailing winds, uphill grades and other local conditions and not based solely on length' CASH 'difficult finish' PAGC the finishing ones should be long and difficult, for they are often the deciding ones in a match and no one should win a game on an easy hole' PAGC 'Every shot in the game should be planned and the holes should be so arranged that each one is different from the following one' PAGC 'As considerable play takes place in the late afternoon, if possible do not face too many holes into the west, because of the irritation of the sun' ROUTING DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • First and tenth holes should be located In close proximity to the clubhouse. • Courses should measure between 6,000-6,600 yards • Courses should start off on an easy par 4 or 5 to avoid congestion • The variety in length and difficulty of holes should be evenly distributed throughout the round. The hardest hole should be integrated into the back nine and the second hardest hole should appear no earlier than midway through the front nine. • The most challenging holes on the course should not be challenging solely based on length; rather they require careful consideration of prevailing wind, grades and other local conditions as well. • Three or four par 3s should be interspersed throughout the round however not near the beginning or end of a round • Each shot in the game should be planned and every hole should be different from the one that preceded it. • The finish should be long and difficult and finishing holes should not face into the setting sun (west) Pg255 CATEGORY: Site Selection SITE SELECTION (SS): FUNCTION PAGC the deciding factor should be the chemical and physical character of the soil, as the proper selection will save the club thousands of dollars in construction and maintenance RMGC 'the area, while extensive enough, is low lying and flat, and the soil shows only average fertility RMGC The soil for the most part is in good till PAGC In selecting a golf course site, in addition to its accessibility PAGC One hundred and thirty acres is sufficient to layout a course on Less than this should not be used, unless the peculiar character of the land permits, as the course is then apt to be confined and cramped, as well as dangerous PAGC Anything in excess of 130 acres will permit the architect to work in landscape features This is an item that cannot be overlooked, for the fascination of golf is not due solely to the science of the shots, but rather to the aesthetic effect of environment Lately there has been a reaction, and rightly so, against the artificiality and grotesqueness of certain architecture Nature must always be the architect's model SITE SELECTION (SS): AESTHETICS RMGC This site, some 300 acres, extends from a sand dune ridge fronting the ocean, back into a wooded farmland It is traversed by two brooks, has a number of springs and a fresh water lake of approximately 30 acres...The contour and variety of the terrain is ideal for the development of a fine golf course at a comparatively small cost RMGC This area provides craggy cliff land, sandy shore, wooded valley land traversed by a river I know of no place on the whole Atlantic Sea Board where such a variety of terrain can be found in so limited an area. PAGC Apart from the general suitability of the terrain for golf RMGC This coupled with the fact that the community round about is pastorally beautiful and has been the subject of a noted 'best seller', should prove of interest to tourists I have therefore no hesitation in recommending the establishment of the golf course on the property known as Green Gables' (SS) RMGC The landscape, other than the beach, is not particularly attractive If a golf course were constructed here the character would have to be built in artificially, which would be costly and not very interesting to play. The area with its fine beach and buildings is suitable for a community, but it lacks the natural character so necessary to a good golf course ' RMGC 'while sufficient contiguous land could be acquired, it is not the type most suitable for golf The panorama is grand but the area is windblown It is felt considerable artificial character would have to be added to make a golf course, and this coupled with the cost, makes this site undesirable' PAGC There are other factors, which should be taken into consideration, the most important of which is not its picturesqueness, although this is an important item The development of the natural features and planning the artificial work to conform to them requires a great deal of care and forethought' PAGC 'Oftentimes the natural beauty of many a golf course, which the average player assumes was always present, has been created by the skill of the engineer who can see opportunities for beauty in the rough woods, swamps or fields that mean nothing to the unskilled eye' Pg256 SITE SELECTION DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • The chemical and physical character of the soil is of the utmost importance • The site should be readily accessible • Sites that exhibit a variety of topography (generally suitable to golf), natural systems (shores, valleys, farm & woodlands) and water features (streams, rivers, ponds), are preferred. • Sites and surrounding vistas should be aesthetically pleasing/picturesque. • The natural beauty of a site is important, however artificial features can be made to appear natural • The selected site should be at least 130 acres in order to work in natural features CATEGORY: Tees TEES (T): AESTHETICS SDPEI Tees located in the sand dunes 'cribbed in creosoted logs, trees or old beams' RJNP 'round front of lower tee when reseeding' RJNP 'it will make an attractive landscape feature and be much appreciated by those other than golfers' TEES (T): PLAYABILITY SDMO 'at least 2000 sq ft of teeing area for each hole' SDNB 'tees will have a playing surface of 1500 to 2000 Sq ft depending on the length of the hole' SDNO 'tees will average 3000 square feet of teeing space to each hole, divided into two playing areas Tees on the flat will be built up sufficiently to provide good drainage only* SDPEI 'Average 1800 sq ft per hole 'divided into two areas' RJNP 'the present tee is too small and there is no way of extending it to the rear We suggest a peninsula be built out into the lake 20 yards to the left and rear of the existing tee This peninsula should have a surface of 3000 sq ft' SDCBl 'there will be 1800 sq ft of teeing surface to each hole divided into one, two or three areas ' SDCB2 'Will average 1800 square ft of teeing surface to each hole, which may be divided into two areas level to be determined at the discretion of the architect' SDMO 'two tees to each hole located wherever possible, SDNB 'They will be divided into two areas, a back and a forward tee' SDNO 'where however the forward tee is in the line of play from the back tee, it will be kept lower '' SDPEI 'Tees sometimes built up to improve visibility ' SDCB2 'where tees are built up to improve visibility ' SDMO 'Where necessary to improve visibility they will be raised ' RJNP There would be three levels to the first tee, one on the raised portion, one on a level with the existing tee and a third one forward on the level of the fairway' RPEI2 'a new ladies tee should be built at the level of the fairway far side of the bridge which crosses the stream wherever tees are built on the course' SDMO at different angles so as to give variety' PAGC There should be six or seven good two-shotters, with alternate tees for the lengthening or shortening of the holes as the ground is hard or soft or the direction of the wind, to preserve their values' SDMO 'tees will be graded flat on the site' RJNP The carry from this tee will be no longer than the carry from the present tee for it is proposed to build the shore out slightly to shorten the carry. It will really be easier to play from than the old tee, for instead of playing at an angle across the water to the fairway, the shot from the proposed tee to the fairway will be square on.' Pg257 TEES (T): MAINTENANCE SDCB2 'side slopes (tees) will conform to a 2:1 slope as a minimum except where built on precipitous ledges' SDMO 'slopes of the sides of the tees will be drawn out so that they can be cut mechanicall/ SDNB The slope of the sides of the tees where practicable will be a one to five grade so as to permit ease of cutting' RPEI2 make sure if possible to have the slopes long as this makes for ease in maintenance.' TEE DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Teeing area should be 1800-3000 sq ft on average and will depend on the length of the hole. • Teeing area should be split into two or three areas • Where necessary tees should be raised to improve visibility • Ensure maintainable slopes CATEGORY: Vegetation VEGETATION (V): AESTHETICS SDCBl 'the sides and rough bordering the fairways will be cleared of all underbrush and loose debris for a distance of 30 feet back, so as to present a neat attractive appearance' RCAP 'underbrush and remove windfalls, cut stumps close to ground for 30' both sides of fairway ' 'unless clearing is done thoroughly; by this I mean removal of windfall and stumps, it is much better to leave the bush in its natural state' 'removing all logs and windfalls, leaving the young growth, unless this can be done properly, leave it in the raw state' SDNB 'All poplars, shrubs and alders will be cut out of the edge of the rough on the edge of the clearing and the spruce, birch, maple mountain ash and feature trees brought into relief' SDCB2 'Care will be taken not to damage any tree growth around existing clearings The branches will be left feathered down to the ground There will be the most aesthetic treatment possible of all tree life.' SDPEI 'care must be taken not to trim trees around existing clearings The branches must be left feathered down to the ground' SDNO ' rather than rows of trees delineating fairways, all plantings should be done in groups or clumps as indicated on plan ' PAGC 'Open areas may be demarked by the judicious grouping of trees, which may define the fairways or act as a screen to hide some undesirable feature' RCAP 'improve area left rear of green (this area is a piece of scabby clearing and it would have looked better in its natural state) plant more extensively behind green' PAGC 'In clearing fairways, it is good to have an eye to the beautiful Often it is possible, by clearing away undesirable and unnecessary trees on the margin of fairways, to open up a view of some attractive picture and frame it with foliage' BCCAP 'with regards to the landscape of the course, I deem this of utmost importance. When I visited the property, I found the gardener, who I think is a very competent man, planting shrubbery more or less promiscuously at various points around the course I tried to guide him, but landscape is not my fort (think he meant forte), and I gave him the meager notes attached merely to direct him until such time as you go out You will note we suggest that on your next trip you give your ideas on golf course plantings for I feel I have gone further than I had wished to' Pg258 VEGETATION (V): PLAYABILITY RPEI2 'there should be a little clearing done at the left front of #16 tee. The brush between the bay of the lake and the tee has grown up at this point and makes the hole look too formidable.' VEGETATION PRINCIPLES: • Underbrush and windfalls should be cleared for 30' back from the fairway, if not, brush should be left in its natural state. * Trees bordering fairways should be planted in clumps and not rows to define the fairway and hide undesirable views • Branches of existing vegetation should be left feathered down to the ground. * Clearing should be strategic in order to capture and frame views CATEGORY: Water Features WATER FEATURES (WF): AESTHETICS SDPEI Throughout the property will be allowed to take their natural course but where there is likelihood of erosion, banks will be straightened and slopes lengthened ' RCAP 'pond must be scaled to make at least 50% of pond visible from the back tee' PAGC 'but by the picture, which can be created adds greatly to the effert of a course if treated in a natural way' WATER FEATURES (WF): PLAYABILITY PAGC 'Water not only makes good mental and actual hazards' WATER FEATURE DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Water features should be left in their natural state unless slope stabilization is necessary. • Water features should be visible ADDITIONAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES GENERAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • Drainage must always be considered • The beauty of the landscape should always be protected OVERARCHING DESIGN PRINCIPLES: • The most successful course is one that will test the skill of the most advanced player, without discouraging the "duffer", while adding to the enjoyment of both'... • 'Nature must always be the architects model' Pg259 APPENDIX F | Summary of Conservation Assessment Methods Appendix F summarizes six cultural landscape assessment methods for Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom that were reviewed in an effort to find at least one the would provide an appropriate base for the heritage conservation guideline framework that will developed in Part III of this chapter. A list of references for the selected methods has been provided below in the order in which they are summarized and then details of each method are provided in the following pages. The summary format is based on that of Paine & Taylor 1995 (p37- 48). CANADA Cl Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada (HSMBC). (2001). Assessing Sites Associated with Persons of National Significance. C2 Municipal Heritage Partnership Program (MHPP). (N.D.). Evaluating Historic Resources in Alberta. UNITED STATES USl Page, Robert R. (2001). Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide. US2 Page, Robert R., Gilbert, Cathy A. and Dolan, Susan A. (1998). A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports: Contents, Process and Techniques. UNITED KINGDOM UKl Swanwick, Carys. [1] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland. UK2 Swanwick, Carys [2] (2002). Landscape Character Assessment: Guidance for England and Scotland, Topic Paper 5: Understanding Historic Landscape haracter. Pg260 SOURCE: Ci AUTHOR: Historic Sites and Monuments Board of Canada DOCUMENT TITLE: Assessing Sites Associated with Persons of National Historic Significance. DATE: Guidelines first adopted Junes 1996, amended June 2001 LOCATION OF STUDY: Parks Canada STUDY SPONSOR: HSMB TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): Specific to sites associated with persons on national significance SCALE: Not specified OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: The objective of the guidelines is to identify and evaluate properties associated with persons of national significance for designation as a national historic site. HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: In order for a site to be designated through its association with a nationally significant figure in Canada, the reasons for that person is significance must be effectively conveyed at the site through its "associative and physical values" and must meet the "test of integrity" (HSMB 2001). CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES: Sites are valued for their association with a person significant in the history of Canada. Types of associations include: o With his/her productive life (i.e. career) o A venue that was important in the formative or retirement years of the individual o A venue that provided the inspiration for his or her life's work o A property associated with a transformative event in the individual's life o A "symbolic or emotive" memorial of the person (HSMB 2001) Criteria for the "test of Integrity" (HSMB 2001): o The property "must retain sufficient integrity or authenticity to convey the spirit of the place" (HSMB 2001). o The strength of the association between a significant individual and a site can transcend alterations to the property, o A memorial site may be designated for its "symbolic and emotive associations" (HSMB 2001). DATA SOURCE: Not indicated in the document METHODOLOGY (PROCEDURAL FOCUS: INVENTORY, CLASSIFICATION, EVALUATION): o Define the individual's significance to Canadian history o Identify the type of association between the property and significant person (See CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES section), o Compare the nominated site with all other sites "prominently associated with the individual" (HSMB 2001). Pg261 o Designation should be granted to sites that most appropriately demonstrate the reasons for which the person is considered significant, o Sites that have been designed by the person, with which it's associated, should not only be evaluated for association but also be recognized for it's physical values as well, o Evaluate the site for integrity (See CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES section) PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): Designation as a national historic site TYPE OF RESULTS: None indicated specifically. Presumably a narrative would be created to describe the reasons for the person's significance, their association with the site and how the property meets the "test of Integrity" (HSMB 2001). DOCUMENTATION: Presumably in report format COMMENTS: The guidelines outlined in this document are brief, however they indicate an expert- based approach to establishing the nature of the individual's significance, determining their association with the site and evaluating integrity. ** SOURCE: C2 AUTHOR: Municipal Heritage Partnership Program DOCUMENT TITLE: Evaluating Historic Resources in Alberta DATE: n.d. LOCATION OF STUDY: The Province of Alberta, Canada STUDY SPONSOR: Alberta Tourism, Parks, Recreation and Culture TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): comprehensive assessment that is capable of addressing all historic resources in Alberta SCALE: Not specified OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: This document was developed to provide a standardized method for evaluating historical resources that are eligible for designation at the provincial level under the Alberta Historic Resources act. At the time that the document was written municipality within the province of Alberta had authority to implement their own individual strategies for evaluating and designating municipal historical resources, however it was anticipated that this approach would be adopted as a standard throughout the province. Pg262 HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: Alberta's approach provides for a three-part process that included: 1. DETERMINING ELIGIBILITY: (MHPP, pi) In the province of Alberta a resource can be evaluated for designation as long as it does not fall into either of two exclusion categories o Type 1 - "ineligible...under any circumstances" o Type 2 - "not ordinarily eligible, but may qualify for exception under special circumstances" 2. EVALUATING SIGNIFICANCE: (MHPP, pi) o An eligible resource must be significant "within its historical context". This can be determined by comparing the subject resource with others that possess "similar characteristics, within a given context" o A resource must possess significance according to at least one of five criteria for evaluation in order to be considered for designation. 3. ASSESSING INTEGRITY: (MHPP, p2) o Requires identifying character defining elements and then assessing their integrity based on seven aspects o Assessing integrity examines the state of extant character defining features to determine whether they continue to convey the significance of the resource. This evaluation is based on "the criterion for which it has been determined to have significance" o Consideration for designation requires that a resource is determined to be eligible and possesses significance and integrity. CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES: TYPES OF EXCLUSIONS FROM ELIGIBILITY: TYPE 1: INELIGIBLE RESOURCES (MHPP, p3) o Resources outside Alberta o Resources that form part of "an historical park or village" o Non-fixed elements o Resources that have been rebuild using new materials o "Human Remains" TYPE 2: NOT ORDINARILY ELIGIBLE (MHPP, p4) o Burial grounds o "Birthplaces or graves" o Relocated resources o Memorials o Resources less than 50 years old that are considered significant SIGNIFICANCE CRITERIA (MHPP, p6) o Theme/Activity/Cultural Practice/Event o Institution/Person o Design/style/Construction Pg263 o Information Potential o Landmark/Symbolic Value ASPECTS OF INTEGRITY (MHPP, pi3) o Location o Design o Environment o Materials o Workmanship o Feeling o Association DATA SOURCE: None identified however it can be assumed that a majority of this research would rely on literature, archival material and expert observation METHODOLOGY (PROCEDURAL FOCUS: INVENTORY, CLASSIFICATION, EVALUATION): Identify whether the resource is ineligible for designation based on Type 1 or Type 2 criteria. If the resource is ineligible based on Type 2 criteria determine whether the resource falls under one of the "Exceptions" criteria listed on page 5 of the original document. Evaluate significance by o Identifying the appropriate "significance criteria" (MHPP, p6) o Developing a historic context for the resource (MHPP. p7) o Then assessing the significance of the resource "within the established context" (MHPP, p8) Assess integrity o Examine the resource to identify its character defining elements (MHPP, pii) o Assess extant character defining elements to establish "whether they are visible enough to convey their significance" (MHPP, pi3) o "Determine which aspects of integrity are applicable to the criterion under which the resource is being evaluated" (MHPP, pi3) PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): For designation as a provincially significant historical resource TYPE OF RESULTS: None indicated specifically. However the following are anticipated o Description of eligibility o Description of related significance criteria and why it is relevant o Historical context defined by addressing questions related to appropriate significance criteria o List of visible character defining features o List of relevant aspects of integrity and explanation of whether or not they retain their integrity o Description of the significance of the resource Pg264 DOCUMENTATION: Not defined but presumably Narrative Report COMMENTS: This approach outlines a relatively comprehensive systematic expert-based approach to assessing the integrity and evaluating the significance of a historical resource for the purposes of designation under the Alberta Historic Resources act. The system relies on determining eligibility and then identifying the applicable significance criteria prior to defining inventorying character-defining features, developing a historic context that will form the basis for evaluating significance or identifying relevant aspect of integrity. This approach provides a relatively comprehensive system of assessment. ** SOURCE: USI AUTHOR: Robert Page, Cathy A. Gilbert and Susan A. Dolan DOCUMENT TITLE: A Guide to Cultural Landscape Reports (CLR): Content, Process and Techniques DATE: 1998 LOCATION OF STUDY: United States National Park System STUDY SPONSOR/CLIENT: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): Generic - Can be applied to any cultural landscape type in the National Park System SCALE: Sub-regional or site scale OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: The objective of the CLR is to inform the planning process for all assets within the National Park System (specifically site development plans) by developing treatment strategies and management objectives for cultural landscapes. Context is provided for the document by an introductory section that defines the term cultural landscape and all types thereof; describes the history of cultural Landscape research in the National Park Service (NPS) provides background on the history and development of the Park Cultural Landscape Program created by the NPS; discusses the use of the CLR in sector of Park and Natural Resource Management. The balance of the document outlines the process of creating a Cultural Landscape Report. Part I establishes the methodologies and techniques that are employed by the NPS to conduct inventory and evaluation of cultural landscape resources. Part II provides guidance on developing preservation strategies for long-term management. Finally, part III demonstrates accepted methods of documenting the research. Pg265 HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: The CLR requires that information be gathered on the landscape characteristics and features of the property as well as their relationship to the significance of the property. It can then be used to inform planning strategies that will ensure that the original character of the landscape will persist and will not be negatively impacted through future planning. Preservation goals for treatment and management of cultural landscapes are established through the CLR in response to current conditions, significance and use of the asset. Methods employed by the CLR can benefit other agencies and individuals interested in a similar assessment and planning process. CATEGORIES/TYPOLOGIES: Types of cultural landscapes (Page et al. 1998, pi2): o An HISTORIC SITE is a "landscape significant for its association with a historic event, activity, or person". o HISTORIC DESIGNED LANDSCAPES: are the reflection of a conscious effort of a skilled individual translating their design principle to the landscape. These landscapes can be valued for their association with the significant designer or design theme, movement, and theory or practice in landscape architecture and/or for their design or artistic qualities. o HISTORIC VERNACULAR LANDSCAPES: evolve over time according to the daily lives of individuals. These landscape reflect "traditions, customs, beliefs and values" of people as well as changes therein through "patterns of spatial organization, land use, circulations, vegetation, structures and objects". o ETHNOGRAPHIC LANDSCAPES: are those, which include a diversity of "natural and cultural resources that associated people define as heritage resources". SEVEN ASPECTS OF INTEGRI TY(Page etal. 1998, p72). o Location o Design o Setting o Materials o Workmanship o Feeling o Association DATA SOURCE: (Page et al. 1998, p46-47). Secondary Published: histories of the site, park guidebooks etc. Secondary Unpublished: Seminar papers, theses, reports etc. Diaries & Journals: from individuals involved with the site Landscape design journals, Periodicals and catalogues Newspapers Local records Pg266 Manuscript collections Registries: deeds & Probates NPS Administrative files Plant lists and Catalogs Records of Firm who where involved with the projects Maps, site plans and surveys of the site Design plans Paintings, prints, drawings Photographs Films, videos Oral histories NPS Repositories Other repositories (For complete listing refer to Page et al. 1998, p46-47) METHODOLOGY (PROCEDURAL FOCUS: INVENTORY, CLASSIFICATION, EVALUATION): (Page et ai. 1998). o INTRODUCTION: Develop a management summary o PART I: SITE HISTORY, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION. SITE HISTORY o Develop a site history o Identify the features that define the site o Develop an historic context o Identify period(s) of significance EXISTING CONDITIONS o Document significant features as they exist at present ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION o Compare original and existing features to assess significance within the context of the overall cultural landscape o Evaluate integrity based on the seven aspects of integrity o PART II: TREATMENT o Develop preservation strategies o Describe overall management objectives o PART III: RECORD OF TREATMENT o Summarize the approach used to undertake the work and the cost of the work PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): The function of the CLR is to inform planning processes for cultural landscapes throughout the National Park Service. TYPE OF RESULTS: (Page et al. 1998, p36) o National register documentation prepared for cultural landscape. o Inventory of all landscape characteristics and features "that contribute to the significance of the landscape" o Documentation of the existence and conditions of significant features o Statement of significance o Summary statement Pg267 o Landscape character areas and management zones defined o Treatment plan/ design alternatives o Outline of research methodology, cost of the project and records from the investigation including: field reports, conditions assessments and contract summaries DOCUMENTATION: (Pageetai. 1998) Narrative with supporting graphic information Photographs Plans Design alternatives Site History: Narrative and period Plans Existing conditions: narrative, schematic and scaled drawings Analysis & Evaluation: Period plans, schematic drawings, matrices and narrative COMMENTS: This system provides a broad and flexible approach that addresses inventory and evaluation, but focuses on planning treatment and management strategies for any NPS cultural landscape. This expert-based approach is capable of interfacing with companion NPS documents such as the Historical Resource Study (HRS) and the Cultural Landscape Inventory (CLI) to provide a tremendously comprehensive tool to evaluate and manage park assets. ** SOURCE US2 AUTHOR: Robert R. Page DOCUMENT TITLE: Cultural Landscapes Inventory Professional Procedures Guide DATE: 2001 LOCATION OF STUDY: National Park System STUDY SPONSOR: U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): Generic-Can be applied to any cultural landscape type in the National Park System SCALE: Sub-regional and site scale OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: The primary objective of the CLI is to develop a comprehensive digital inventory to document all "landscapes, component landscapes and associated features" (Page 2001, pis) for all assets within the National Park System. This includes highlighting qualities of a cultural landscape that make it worth preserving and then assessing their integrity and significance. The CLI addresses one of the primary goals of the "National Park Service Strategic Plan" (Page 2001, pi) in that it creates "a scientific/scholarly basis for resource management decisions" (Page 2001, pi) that, combined with companion document CLR, assists in informing the planning, treatment and management strategies. Pg268 HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: The CLI provides a four level inventory and assessment process. Levels 0-11 relate to the inventory and assessment of any "landscape" or "component landscape" property level that is eligible for the National Register of Historic Places. Level III relates to the inventory and assessment of "features that contribute to the significance" (Page 2001, pi3) of either landscape and/or component landscape levels. The CLI provides a linear and systematic inventory process where information is refined throughout each level of the investigation. It establishes a framework that responds to the need in the National Park System to collect fundamental information on a variety of cultural landscape types in order to address NPS programming requirements. Information includes: location, historical description, landscape characteristics and features, evolution of the site, existing conditions, assessment of integrity and significance and documentation thereof. This information is then used to influence management decisions. The CLI was developed in an effort to guide management of cultural landscapes once they had become recognized as valuable cultural resources. Previously the NPS definition of cultural resources and related evaluation literature had only extended to historic structures, archeological resources and museum objects. The CLI provide baseline data upon which the determination of significance for cultural landscapes can be based. The CLI documents information digitally through custom software called Cultural Landscapes Automated Inventory Management Systems (CLAIMS). CATEGORIES /TYPOLOGIES: CLI hierarchy for subdividing landscape (also referred to as "Property Levels"): o LANDSCAPE: refers to a "combination of component landscapes and/or features that define a cultural landscape" (Page 2001, pio) eligible for nomination to the National register and therefore it provides the central focus for the CLI (Page 2001) o LANDSCAPE FEATURE: refers to the "smallest physical unit that contributes to the significance of a landscape and can be managed as an Individual element" (Page 2001, pii) o LANDSCAPE COMPONENT: refers to a "definable physical area of a landscape that contributes to the significance of the National Register Property or, in some cases is individually eligible for the national register. A component landscape warrants individual documentation to adequately record the physical character of the overall landscape and can be further subdivided into smaller features" (Page 2001, pll) o LANDSCAPE COMPONENT FEATURE: "the smallest physical unit that contributes to the significance of a component landscape and can be managed as an individual element" (Page 2001, pii) Pg269 DATA SOURCE: None specified METHODOLOGY (PROCEDURAL FOCUS: INVENTORY, CLASSIFICATION, EVALUATION): (Page 2001) The methodology used in the CLI is designed to responds a diversity of property scales through a systematic approach that defines the scope of the project, establishes appropriate priorities and reacts appropriately to the need of park management. The CLI document is separated into three sections: I: Identifies the purpose and use & relationship to Cultural resource management II: Addresses the inventory, instructions and supplemental guidance for Landscapes and component landscape. Ill: Addresses the inventory, instructions and supplemental guidance for Landscape features and component landscape features. The inventory process include four levels: "LEVEL 0: PARK RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY" (Page 2001, pii): o Identify all known and potential cultural landscapes within the individual PARK o Identify threats and recommended actions o Segment the park in terms of the CLI hierarchy o Establish which properties are priorities for Level I inventory survey "LEVEL I: LANDSCAPE RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY" (Page 2001, pi3): o Conduct historical research and a site visit o Identify information requirements for "landscape or component landscape property levels in the park o identify threats and recommend appropriate actions o Develop a "preliminary statement of significance (or non- significance)...based on National Register criteria" (pi3) o Prepare site maps at highest resolution possible o Develop summary chart and project statement to inform Resource Management Plan o Establish priorities for Level II inventory "LEVEL II: LANDSCAPE ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION" (Page 2001, pi3) o Identify and assess the conditions of landscape characteristics and features o Assign management category o Identify significant adjacent lands o Identify contributing and non contributing characteristics and features o Determine or clarify (depending on previous investigation) National Register eligibility of the property o Determine and document anticipated cost for treatment or stabilization o Revised site maps to a higher degree of resolution Pg270 "LEVEL ill: FEATURE INVENTORY & ASSESSMENT" (Page 2001, pis): o Document history and conditions of features o Create site map indicating the location of features o Assess Condition of features o Assign management category o Determine cost for treatment/stabilization PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): Inventory all cultural landscapes in the National Parks System TYPE OF RESULTS: LEVEL 0: o "indicative list of significant landscapes" (Page 2001, pll) o "strategy for completion of Level I and II" (Page 2001, pll) o '7/st of research needs" (Page 2001, pii) Level I: o "Level I forms (Coordinator Review Report)" (Page 2001, pi3) o "indicative list of potentially significant landscapes" (Page 2001, pi3) o "strategy for completion of Level II" (Page 2001, pi3) o "list of research needs" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Site Maps" (Page 2001, pl3) o "RMP Chart for cultural landscapes" (Page 2001, pl3) o "RMP Project Statements" (Page 2001, pl3) LEVEL II: o "Level IIforms (Coordinator Review Report)" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Indicative list of potentially significant landscapes" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Strategy for completion of Level III" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Revised Site Maps" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Revised RMP Chart for cultural landscapes" (Page 2001, pi3) o "RMP Project Statements" (Page 2001, pi3) o "Preliminary management recommendations" (Page 2001, pl3) o "Park CLI information package" (Page 2001, pl3) o 'Technical assistance report" (Page 2001, pi3) Level III: o "Level informs (Coordinator Review Report)" (Page 2001, pl5) o "Recommendations for revisions/updates to associated databases" (Page 2001, pl5) o "Revised Site Maps" (Page 2001, pis) o "RMP Project Statements" (Page 2001, pis) o "Preliminary management recommendations" (Page 2001, pis) o "Park CLI information package"(Page 2001, pis) o 'Technical assistance report" (Page 2001, pis) DOCUMENTATION: CLI Forms, numerical data, maps, pictures, other graphics information, Narrative text, brief text, GIS/auto cad information CLAIMS Database (Page 2001) COMMENTS: This system provides a thorough and systematic approach that focuses specifically on inventory and evaluation of cultural landscapes at a variety of scales, so that intricate details of the site are not missed. The CLI is an expert based approach that is compatible with the CLR document also developed by the NPS and can add a higher degree of resolution to that process to inform planning, treatment and management strategies. ** Source UKl AUTHOR: Carys Swanwick, Department of Landscape, University of Sheffield and Land Use Consultants DOCUMENT TITLE: Landscape Character Assessment, Guidance for England and Scotland DATE: 2002 LOCATION OF STUDY: Scotland and England STUDY SPONSOR: The Countryside Agency and Scottish Natural Heritage TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): Generic - applicable to all "landscapes" in England or Scotland. SCALE: From national level (1:250,000) to parish level (local authority scale: 1:50,000 or 1:25,000; local scale 1:10,000) to site scale (estate, farm or country park) however is most useful at coarser scale (Swanwick 2002) EVALUATOR/TEAM: Core team: landscape specialist & planner (informed by specialist in landscape history, archeology, ecology, agriculture and forestry) (Swanwick2002) OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: To contribute to sustainable development initiatives within England and Scotland by outlining methods and techniques for assessing the "character" of any landscape, not necessarily of a historic nature To recognize the current state of a landscape and understand the natural and cultural factors that influenced its developed to date, and to ensure that future development initiative would not compromise aspects of the landscape that are "characteristic or valued" (Swanwick 2002, p3) To recognize "environmental and cultural features" (Swanwick 2002, p2) native to the region To "monitor change" (Swanwick 2002, p2) and recognize the impacts of development within a locality To inform planning processes Pg272 HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: Landscape character classification and documentation should be addressed independently from evaluation Landscape Character Assessment provides an approach that considers character as well as values and involves "identifying, mapping, classifying and describing landscape character" (Swanwick 2002, p2) Landscape character of can be addressed at a variety of scales with each finer level providing a greater degree of resolution, however the system performs best at larger (regional or national) scales. CATEGORIES /TYPOLOGIES: CATEGORIES OF LANDSCAPE CHARACTER: LANDSCAPE CHARACTER TYPE is a distinctive landscape that is "relatively homogenous in character" (Swanwick 2002, p9). These types can exist in different geographical locations but alike types will share similar landscape characteristics (Swanwick 2002) LANDSCAPE CHARACTER AREAS: are the discrete sections of a landscape type that demonstrate their own personality although they are related to the type through "generic characteristics" (Swanwick 2002, p9) ASPECTS THAT CREATE LANDSCAPE CHARACTER: (Swanwick 2002) NATURAL FACTORS: geology, landform, river and drainage systems, soils, land cover (including semi-natural vegetation) (Swanwick 2002, p23-24) CULTURAL FACTORS: land use, settlement pattern, pattern of field enclosure (Swanwick 2002, p24) AESTHETIC ASPECTS: Scale, enclosure, diversity, texture, form, line, colour, balance, movement, pattern, proportion (Swanwick 2002, p34) PERCEPTUAL ASPECTS: sense of wildness, sense of security, quality of light, perception of beauty or scenic attractiveness (Swanwick 2002, p34) DATA SOURCE: (Swanwick 2002, p22) British Geological survey data Ordnance survey data Soil survey data & report Land Cover map of Scotland Phase I Habitat survey Natural area profile (England) Natural heritage future (Scotland) Aerial photos Forestry commission woodland inventories Ancient woodland inventories Historical data, maps & estate plans Pg273 Historical Landscape Character studies Rural settlement atlas (England) MAFF Agricultural land classification 2nd Land Utilization Survey METHODOLOGY (Procedural focus: inventory, classification, evaluation): STAGE 1: A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO LANDSCAPE CHARACTER ASSESSMENT (Swanwick 2002, pi4) Four step process mainly involving procedural instructions for: o DEFINE SCOPE o Describe purpose & aim, o Define scale & level of detail, o Identify people and resource requirements, o Determine stakeholder input o DESK STUDY o Define natural factors: geology, landform, drainage, soils, land cover/vegetation o Define cultural and social factors: land use, settlement, enclosure & time depth o Draft landscape character types and/or areas o FIELD SURVEY o Plan the field survey o Record Aesthetic and perceptual aspects o Perceived character o Conditions sensitivity trends o CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION STAGE 2: LANDSCAPE CHARACTER ASSESSMENT IN PRACTICE (Swanwick 2002, pi4) o IDENTIFY APPROACH TO JUDGMENTS o Define approach and criteria o Research other evidence o Field observation o Make Judgment PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): TYPE OF RESULTS: o Map of character types and areas o Description of character types and areas o Description of key characteristics o Landscape enhancement proposal o Information for planning Policies o Special Recognition o Landscape Strategies and Guidelines o Proposals for locating and designing development Pg274 DOCUMENTATION: o Landscape character type and/or area maps o Field survey sheets o Checklist (landscape elements and their significance & Aesthetic and perpetual factors) o Written reports o Annotated sketches o Annotated field survey maps o Overlays of landscape factors o Photographs o Illustrations o GIS mapping COMMENTS: The Landscape Character assessment provides an example of an expert-based assessment methodology designed to acknowledge the current conditions of a landscape and to recognize the factors the influenced its current reality. Additionally the assessment anticipates what the landscape might be like in the future. This assessment method considers all landscapes throughout England and Scotland not simply the historic or 'special' ones. Historic landscapes are addressed however, through the Historic Landscape Characterization (HLC) developed by English Heritage; the Historic Landuse Assessment (HLA) developed by Historic Scotland and the RCAHMS. Those documents will be addressed in UK2 herein, which reviews Landscape Character Assessment: Topic Paper 5. The landscape character assessment provides a system that can be used to investigate urban wasteland or a rural countryside equally. This approach is most appropriate for coarse scale landscape character assessment where patterns of the landscape are of greater concern then the details. This system works on a GIS platform and does not consider point data, therefore although capable of operating at a fine scale, the author (Swanwick 2002) considers it "time consuming and resource intensive" and says that it "should only used where a detailed local perspective is essential" (Swanwick 2002, pis). ** SOURCE UK2 AUTHOR: Carys Swanwick, Department of Landscape, University of Sheffield and Land Use Consultants DOCUMENT TITLE: Landscape Character Assessment, Guidance for England and Scotland Document, TOPIC PAPER 5: Understanding Historic Landscape Character (A paper exploring the relationship between Landscape character assessment and Historic Landscape Characterization/Historic Land-use Assessment). DATE: 2002 LOCATION OF STUDY: Scotland and England STUDY SPONSOR: The Countryside Agency and Scottish Natural Heritage Pg275 TYPE OF STUDY (COMPREHENSIVE OR SELECTIVE, GENERIC OR SITE SPECIFIC): Generic Suited for assessment of historic landscapes in England: Historic Landscape Characterization (HLC) and in Scotland: Historic Landuse Assessment (HLA) SCALE: broad scale OBJECTIVE OF STUDY/GUIDELINES: (Swanwick 2002A) TOPIC PAPER 5 is designed to demonstrate the relationship between the Landscape Characterization Assessment (LCA) and the historic Landscape characterization (HLC)/Historic Land-use Assessment (HLA) HLC/HLA have each been developed a means of assessing historic landscapes and informing research, education, planning, policy, management and communication thereof in their respective countries. HYPOTHESIS/ASSUMPTION: (Swanwick 2002A) The term landscape can be distinguished from "environment" as it refers "an idea not a thing" (Swanwick 2002A, p2) this is a construct of the human mind developed through a perception of place. The HLC/HLA can either function as standalone assessments or can be combined with LCA in order to provide background on the evolution of historic landscapes. The methodologies presented in HLC/HLA documents are partially derived from the approaches of the LCA. For instance the HLC/HLA operate on GIS platforms so that they are compatible and can interface effectively with LCA. Unlike the LCA the HLC/HLA focus more on the human activities that have affected the site over time and consider the cultural perceptions that shape how we understand the landscape today. The LCA on the other hand, focuses on the natural factors however ideally it would demonstrate consideration of HLC/HLA conclusions in their process and reflected in the LCA outputs. The HLC/HLA provide broad scale investigations that aren't intended to provide detail of the landscape, but rather, can quickly reveal what is and isn't known about the property so that areas of interest for future research can be identified. CATEGORIES/INDICATORS/TYPOLOGIES: Principles for assessing historic landscape character: (Swanwick 2002A) o The primary objective of the HLC/HLA is to preserve the landscapes that exist today by recognizing how human interaction and perception have contributed to their development o From the perspective of the HLC/HLA, remnants from other eras evident within landscape are the most significant characteristic of a modern landscape, o The HLC/HLA provide broad scale approaches to landscape assessment o HLC/HLA address all landscape resources "not just special areas" (Swanwick 2002A, p2) o Natural features and archeological remnants are considered to be of equal value to the HLC/HLA Pg276 DATA SOURCE: Not described but presumably same as LCA METHODOLOGY (Procedural focus: inventory, classification, evaluation): (Swanwick 2002A) The HLC/HLA are spatial and map based approach that relying on GIS technologies Primarily research: synthesizes of existing data (Swanwick 2002A) o Record and interpret historic land use data o Review and synthesize data sets (boundaries, land parcels, building, habitats, vegetation) o Produce historic characterization o Document assumed historic landscape character o Record change over time o Record attributes as polygons in GIS PURPOSE (DATABASE, PLANNING, DESIGNATION): (Swanwick 2002A) To inform the LCA and/or sustainable planning initiatives TYPE OF RESULTS: (Swanwick 2002A) • GIS data and landscape character Type results compatible with LCA o Time-depth and historical land-use assessment (GIS map) o Historic Land-use categories map (GIS) o Historic Land-use period map (GIS) o Relict Categories map (GIS) o Relict Types Map (GIS) o Relict Period map (GIS) o Historic Land-use Types with relict Types map (GIS) o Landscape Types Map (GIS) DOCUMENTATION: GIS map series and narrative (Swanwick 2002A) COMMENTS: the HLC/HLA function to determine historical landscape character. This is a broad scale and superficial approach that does not appear to be effective at component landscape or feature level and therefore will not require further investigation. Pg277